Quarterlytics / Technology / Semiconductors / Smart Global

Smart Global

sgh · ASX Technology
Claim this profile
Ticker sgh
Exchange ASX
Sector Technology
Industry Semiconductors
Employees 501-1000
← All annual reports
FY2015 Annual Report · Smart Global
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Annual Report

2015

Foundations for growth

Contents

Highlights 

Chair’s Report 

 Group Managing Director’s Report 

Slater and Gordon Group Overview 

Group Activities 

 Corporate Social Responsibility 

Board of Directors and Company Secretary 

Operating and Financial Review 

Financial Statements 

Directors’ Report  

Auditor’s Independence Declaration  

Consolidated Statement of Profit or  
Loss and Other Comprehensive Income  

Consolidated Statement  
of Financial Position  

Consolidated Statement  
of Changes in Equity  

Consolidated Statement  
of Cash Flows  

Notes to the Financial Statements  

Slater and Gordon Limited  
Directors’ Declaration  

Independent Auditor’s Report  

Additional ASX Information  

Corporate Directory  

1

2

4

6

9

11

12

16

22

23

65

66

67

68

69

70

136

137

139

140

Images in this report feature Slater and Gordon 
Manchester (UK) office staff.

Slater and Gordon Limited 

 Annual Report 2015

Slater and Gordon is the leading provider of consumer legal 
services in Australia and, more recently, the UK where we’ve  
now established a strong platform for future growth.

Highlights

Revenue 
(up by 43.2%)

FY14 
$438.2m

FY13 
$298.0m

FY15 
$627.3m

FY11 
$182.3m

FY12 
$217.7m

Normalised EBITDA 
(up by 20.6%)

FY14 
$100.8m

FY13 
$72.9m

FY15 
$121.6m

FY11 
$49.9m

FY12 
$57.6m

Normalised NPAT  
(up by 12.1%)

Normalised Basic EPS  
(up by 12.4%)

FY15 
$70.7m

FY14 
$63.0m

FY13 
$41.8m

FY11 
$28.9m

FY12 
$33.4m

FY14 
30.3¢

FY13 
24.1¢

FY15 
34.0¢

FY11 
19.1¢

FY12 
21.7¢

Normalised data is adjusted for:
FY15 – Acquisition costs, discount on acquisition, early termination of lease and AASB3 policy change. Also excludes one month of SGS.
FY14 – WIP adjustment relating to the Fenton’s acquisition, an onerous lease provision, acquisition costs and AASB3 policy change.
FY13 – Acquisition costs.
FY12 – Write-down of the VIOXX class action.

 Annual Report 2015

Slater and Gordon Limited 

1

Chair’s Report

“We believe we are 
progressing well  
ahead of our long- 
term strategic goal.”

Dear Shareholder, 

I am pleased to present the Slater and 
Gordon Limited (Slater and Gordon 
Group) Annual Report for the 2015 
financial year.

The past year has been a year of 
opportunity and challenges, both  
of which have made us a stronger 
and better company.

Slater and Gordon Group continued 
its track record of delivering strong 
financial results for shareholders. In 
Australia, our Personal Injury Law 
(PIL) practice remained resilient and 
our General Law (GL) practice made 
solid progress. The acquisition, in 
November 2014, of Nowicki Carbone 
and Schultz Toomey O’Brien added 
strength and capability to our 
Australian operations. 

In the UK, we successfully integrated 
the businesses acquired during the 
2014 financial year, transitioning  
our Manchester operations from  
three locations into one, and 
implementing a new case and  
practice management system. 

In May we completed what was by  
far our largest acquisition, with the 
A$1.3 billion purchase of Quindell 
Plc’s Professional Services Division 
(PSD), a leading PIL service provider 
operating across the claims value 
chain providing legal, health and 
motor services. The PSD operations 
have been rebranded as Slater Gordon 
Solutions.

2

In the UK we have now established  
a compelling service offering across 
the full range of personal legal 
services and employ approximately 
3,950 people across 28 locations.  
We believe we are progressing well 
ahead of our long-term strategic goal 
of building a platform from which  
we can deliver significant value  
for shareholders.

Clearly such a large transaction is 
not undertaken without extensive due 
diligence. We had more than 70 of 
our lawyers review over 8,000 case 
files and the benefit of independent 
advice from our external advisers to 
ensure that our bottom-up evaluation 
of the PSD opportunity was sound. 
We are very fortunate that Ken Fowlie 
has relocated to the UK to lead these 
operations. Ken has over 20 years 
experience with the Group and most 
recently headed Slater and Gordon 
Lawyers in Australia. The Board is 
confident Ken is the best person to run 
and grow this business. As well as the 
existing UK management, Ken is being 
well supported by a dedicated team 
including Kirsten Morrison, who has 
also relocated to the UK to take up  
the role of General Counsel UK.

Unfortunately, the medium and  
long-term opportunities created  
by the acquisition have been clouded 
by some short-term challenges.  
Our approach to managing these  
has been robust and transparent. 

Some shareholders have voiced 
concerns about our decision to 
support the transaction by raising 
equity using a pro rata renounceable 
rights offer, a decision made in 
consultation with our advisers 
Greenhill Caliburn and Citi. Given  
the circumstances, the pressing timing 
constraints of the acquisition, and in 
particular the transaction’s demand 
for funding certainty and immediacy, 
the Board and senior management 
team still believe that the process  
we undertook and the structure  
we adopted were appropriate. 

In June, the Company was notified 
that the Australian Securities and 
Investments Commission (ASIC) 
intended to raise some queries 
regarding the Group’s accounting 
procedures. 

In the course of preparing the responses 
consolidation errors in the reporting 
of historical UK cash flows were 
identified. Whilst these errors were 
unfortunate they have now been 
rectified and had no impact on the 
net cash from operating activities, 
which remains as reported. The ASIC 
review process has been extensive and 
Slater and Gordon Group continues to 
cooperate fully with ASIC to allow it 
to conclude its review process, which 
the Company expects to be completed 
shortly.

During the year we implemented 
several initiatives to ensure that  
a sound corporate governance 
framework remains in place as the 
Company grows. These initiatives 
include a search for the appointment 
of an additional two Non-Executive 
Directors to the Board, strengthening 
our Governance, Risk and Internal 
Audit function and enhancing our 
financial disclosures. A process also 
commenced to request expressions of 
interest from global firms to conduct 
our Group audit, and we expect a 
global audit firm to be appointed in 
time for first half FY16 results. I look 
forward to updating you on these 
activities throughout the year.

It is true to say that Slater and Gordon 
is one of the world’s leading providers 
of consumer legal services, with a 
strong track record and a strong 
platform for ongoing growth. This 
year has been a pivotal one in our 
development. We know there is still  
a great deal of growth potential ahead 
as our team continues its relentless 
focus on delivering great outcomes  
for clients.

On behalf of the Board of Directors, 
I would like to thank you for your 
ongoing support and reassure you of 
our unwavering commitment to long-
term value creation for shareholders. 

Yours sincerely,

John Skippen 
Chair

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
We believe  
in making things
clear and simple  
for our clients.

3

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  Group Managing Director’s Report

traffic accident where they are not 
at fault, whether it’s arranging car 
repairs, replacement car hire or 
resolving a personal injury claim, 
including arranging medical or 
ancillary care.

Continued Investment  
in Slater and Gordon 
Lawyers Brand
We also continued to invest heavily  
in the Slater and Gordon Lawyers 
brand throughout the year, including 
the successful launch of a refreshed 
brand across the Group. In Australia 
brand awareness remains strong at 
72%, and in the UK the brand has 
now achieved 24% awareness – a 
significant lift on the 11% awareness 
achieved in the UK in 2014. 

Initiatives to Improve 
Client Satisfaction 
Client-focused initiatives aimed at 
increasing client satisfaction also 
delivered results. Independent 
research for the Australian business 
showed good improvements across 
the board, particularly in the client 
triage function, which has been a 
particular focus of activity. This  
focus is being matched by similar 
activity within our UK business. 

Integration of Acquired 
Businesses
We acquired a number of practices 
during FY15 that added further 
strength to our Australian and UK 
operations. These practices, along 
with those acquired during FY14, were 
substantially integrated during the 
year and are performing according  
to expectations. In FY16 our focus will 
shift to completing the integration 
process and taking the opportunity  
to enhance operational effectiveness, 
rather than looking for further 
acquisition opportunities. 

UK Single IT System
The implementation of a single 
integrated finance and practice 
management IT system across Slater 
and Gordon Lawyers (UK) is almost 
complete, with the full integration of 
all staff onto the platform expected 
in FY16. This has been a successful 

project and represents a genuine 
opportunity for us to design into 
our UK operations the operating 
conditions needed to deliver  
ongoing productivity gains.

Management Team  
Restructure
With the Group now entering its next 
phase of maturity, we are building the 
management structures needed in the 
fee earning community, our shared 
services groups and at the corporate 
level to take the organisation forward 
successfully. In terms of the leadership 
team, along with Ken Fowlie heading 
Slater Gordon Solutions, we are 
fortunate to have Cath Evans and 
Hayden Stephens commencing in their 
new roles as CEO’s of Personal Injury 
Law and General Law respectively.  
I look forward to updating you on 
their progress during the year.  

Overall, there has been a lot of 
productive activity with plenty  
of the initiatives continuing in  
to this financial year. 

FY16 Priorities
In FY16 our key areas of focus will  
be improving cash performance  
across the Group, enhancing 
operational effectiveness and 
successfully delivering the Slater 
Gordon Solutions (SGS) operational 
and financial targets. 

We believe the legislative environment 
will remain relatively stable in both 
Australia and the UK. 

I would like to thank our clients for 
trusting Slater and Gordon with their 
legal matters during 2015 and our  
staff for their professionalism and 
tireless endeavours. And I would like 
to thank you, our shareholders, for  
your support.

Yours sincerely,

Andrew Grech 
Group Managing Director 

“We acquired a number 
of practices during  
FY15 that added  
further strength to  
our Australian and  
UK operations.”

Dear Shareholder, 

I am very pleased to deliver another 
set of operating and financial results 
demonstrating resilience and ongoing 
improvement in key areas of the Slater 
and Gordon Group. Overall, Slater 
and Gordon Lawyers has performed 
well and the outlook for this financial 
year is strong. Pleasingly, as well as 
delivering our financial performance 
targets we also achieved a great deal 
of progress with initiatives aimed  
at setting up our operations for 
ongoing success. 

UK Growth Platform 
Established 
Clearly the acquisition of a number 
of business assets from Quindell Plc, 
which we described at the time of 
the transaction as the Professional 
Services Division (PSD), was the 
most significant activity of the year, 
establishing the Slater and Gordon 
Group as the clear leader in PIL in the 
UK and providing us with what we 
believe is a platform for continued 
growth. The PSD operations provide 
the scale and access to channels of 
new business generation required 
to continue to grow our UK business 
organically. The business, now 
rebranded as Slater Gordon Solutions, 
is uniquely placed to solve the 
problems experienced by clients  
when they are involved in a road  

4

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  We inspire people  
to find the best  
way forward.

5

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  Slater and Gordon Group Overview

Employees

Brands

5,350

Shareholders

Locations

19,000+

95

FY15 Revenue A$627.3 million

Slater and Gordon Lawyers Australia 50%

Slater and Gordon Lawyers UK 44%

Slater Gordon Solutions 6% 
(Note: one-month contribution)

Who We Are
Slater and Gordon Group is a leading 
provider of consumer legal services  
in Australia and the United Kingdom 
(UK). We employ 1,400 people in 67 
locations across Australia and 3,950 
people in 28 locations in the UK. 

Our Mission 
To give everyday people easier access 
to world-class legal services.

Our Values 
•  Do it right.

•  Work well with others.

•  Take the lead.

Our Services 
•  Personal Injury Law (PIL)  

Provides expert legal services in 
a range of personal injury areas 
including motor vehicle accidents, 
workers’ compensation and  
civil liability law. 

•  General Law (GL)  

GL is made up of Personal Legal 
Services (PLS) and Business and 
Specialised Litigation Services 
(B&SLS). PLS comprises family law, 
conveyancing, wills, estate planning 
and probate practices. B&SLS 
comprises business law, property 
law, estate, employment and 
professional negligence litigation, 
class or group actions and criminal  
defence work. 

•  Claims 

Our Slater Gordon Solutions  
claims business in the UK focuses  
on the assessment and resolution  
of road traffic accident claims.

•  Motor and Health services 

Slater Gordon Solutions also 
provides motor vehicle accident 
management support and 
rehabilitation and medical  
reporting management solutions.

6

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  Our Strategy

Outcome

Growth Strategy

Satisfied clients, engaged staff, sustainable shareholder returns

Leading consolidation  
of the UK PIL market 

Building an efficient, integrated  
operating platform in the UK

Delivering strong earnings growth from  
the Australian PIL practices

Building on our platform in GL consumer legal services 

Key Drivers

Client  
Experience

Brand and 
Marketing

People and  
Culture

Striving to put 
clients at the centre 
of everything  
we do

Leveraging the 
power of the 
Slater and Gordon 
Lawyers and  
in-house brands

Building an aligned, 
skilled and engaged 
labour force

Operations

Building an  
efficient and  
robust operating 
platform 

Innovation in our 
service offering, 
delivery modes and 
the management of 
the organisation

 Annual Report 2015

Slater and Gordon Limited 

7

Our mission is to  
give people easier 
access to world-
class legal services.

8

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  Group Activities

We continue to invest in the key 
drivers of our business: the client 
experience, brand and marketing, 
people and culture, and operations.

In September 2014, we evolved the 
Slater and Gordon Lawyers brand. 
This was positively received by  
our clients in both the PIL and  
GL practices. 

developed an extensive range  
of learning and development 
curriculums to address the unique 
requirements of each of our UK  
legal practice areas.

Client Experience
The firm is focused on continuously 
improving the experience of its clients 
with the goal of improving client 
satisfaction, lifting conversion and 
building client advocacy. Several 
initiatives were undertaken during 
FY15 that improved the way we intake 
clients to the firm and assist them in 
navigating the legal process. 

In Australia, this resulted in an increase 
in client satisfaction. Independent 
research measured total client 
satisfaction for Slater and Gordon 
Lawyers increasing from a score of 70 
in 2014 to 76 in 2015. In the UK, client 
satisfaction was measured for the  
first time with a score of 68. 

Brand and Marketing
Slater and Gordon Lawyers is one 
of the best-known law firm brands 
in Australia and the UK. Currently, 
the Group consists of the following 
brands: Slater and Gordon Lawyers 
(Australia and UK); Nowicki Carbone, 
part of the Slater and Gordon Group 
(Victoria); Shultz Toomey O’Brien 
Lawyers, part of the Slater and 
Gordon Group (Queensland); 
Fentons Solicitors, part of the Slater 
and Gordon Group (UK), Claims 
Direct (UK); Slater Gordon Solutions 
(UK); Accident Advice Helpline 
(UK); Mobile Doctors (UK); and 
Compass Costs (UK). Our house of 
brands reduced during FY15, with 
Trilby Misso Lawyers (Queensland), 
Conveyancing Works (Queensland), 
and Pannone (UK) all successfully 
transitioning to the Slater and  
Gordon Lawyers brand. During FY16 
we will carefully consolidate the 
Nowicki Carbone, Schultz Toomey 
O’Brien and Fentons brands into the 
Slater and Gordon Lawyers brand.

In Australia, prompted brand 
awareness is strong at 72%. 
Significant increases in brand 
awareness have been achieved in 
Queensland and New South Wales, 
 strengthening our position as a 
national brand.  

In the UK, Slater and Gordon Lawyers 
is now the third best-known law firm 
in the nation, dominating the market 
across a number of key channels. The 
Slater and Gordon Lawyers brand 
has 24% prompted brand awareness 
nationally in only its second full 
financial year of operation in the 
UK. This is a more than doubling of 
awareness year on year. High visibility 
media coverage has seen Slater and 
Gordon become recognised as a 
leading consumer law commentator 
with our lawyers making regular 
speaking appearances across a broad 
spectrum of media channels regularly. 
We also opened our first UK retail 
space in the new Manchester office. 
This custom-built space is designed 
to encourage ‘walk-ins’ from clients 
seeking legal advice. Visitors to the 
Slater and Gordon retail space can 
find information on our full range of 
services. Web access is also provided 
to visitors, enabling them to go online 
and learn more about the services we 
offer. Visitors can also have an initial 
meeting with one of our legal advisers.

People and Culture
At Slater and Gordon we believe  
that our people are the heart of our 
success as an organisation. During 
the year we continued to implement 
initiatives focused on creating  
an aligned, skilled and engaged  
labour force.

In Australia, we continued to build 
on ‘Rewarding You Fairly’ – our 
remuneration framework – to include 
a mid-year check-in and integration 
of the firm’s values into development 
and performance conversations. 
Our learning programs have been 
expanded, with additional people 
leader, technical and coaching 
programs. 

This year we introduced ‘Rewarding 
You Fairly’ to our UK business. It 
provides a consistent, clear and solid 
platform for professional growth  
and development. We have also

In the UK, we take part in the BSN 
Diversity League Tables every year, 
a survey that provides a benchmark 
for performance on diversity strands 
of gender, ethnicity, disability and 
sexual orientation. In FY15, Slater and 
Gordon Lawyers UK was in the top  
10 of the Diversity League Tables on 
our overall score, and featured in  
the top five in two individual tables  
–our ranking for female partners  
and female associates. 

Operations
Our highly developed work process 
design and technology expertise 
provides us with a unique competitive 
advantage. Business improvement 
initiatives are being implemented to 
make sure we are working effectively 
across the firm after a period of rapid 
growth. In FY15 we have been focused 
on effectively integrating our acquired 
businesses. 

In the UK, the Slater and Gordon 
Lawyers practice management and 
client management system has been 
implemented with the final phase  
due for completion in FY16. We 
are establishing the standard core 
platform on which Slater and 
Gordon Lawyers UK will operate. 
We continue to invest in project 
management, change management 
and digital capabilities to enhance 
our ability to deliver whole-of-firm 
improvements in both Australia  
and the UK.

9

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
We’re always  
on our clients’  
side, championing
their cause.

10

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  Corporate Social Responsibility

One of the defining features of  
Slater and Gordon Group is our 
relationship with the local people  
and communities we serve. In addition 
to our pro bono legal work, we 
encourage and support community 
engagement through philanthropic 
giving, sponsorship activities and staff 
fundraising and volunteering efforts. 
We focus our social responsibility 
efforts into three key areas:

1.  Assisting people with disease  

and disability.

2. Addressing inequality and 

disadvantage.

3. Encouraging young people to 
engage in healthy activity and 
lifestyles.  

During FY15 we increased our support 
of community organisations working 
in these areas and we significantly 
increased our investment in community 
partnerships.

FY15 Highlights
•  Our international Health Projects 
and Research Fund distributed its 
first round of grants, distributing 
£103,500 to eight applicants in the 
UK and A$77,500 to three recipients 
in Australia;

•   we increased the membership of our 
Staff Giving Program in Australia by 
11%, contributing to the distribution 
of almost A$100,000 to community 
groups;

•   our UK staff supported numerous 
charities that aid our injured and 
bereaved clients through fundraising 
activities such as sponsored cycle 
rides, runs, climbs, hikes and events, 
while also assisting on steering 
committees and with sponsored 
events; 

•  we achieved a 10% increase in the 
number of lawyers performing  
pro bono work in Australia; 

•   we became the official supplier 

of legal services to the Australian 
Olympic Team;

•   increased our staff participation in 
the Mother’s Day Classic by 20%, 
with 520 staff participating and 
our Melbourne team achieving the 
largest corporate team in the state;

•   signed up as a corporate supporter 
of the Australian Marriage Equality 
campaign and contributed to other 
key events and campaigns to address 
inequality;

•   partnered with the Newcastle 
Jets to support their Jet Well 
community program in local 
hospitals; and

•   we were the official AFL match day 
partner for the Robert Rose Cup, 
which promotes disability inclusion 
through sporting and community 
participation.

FY16 Priorities 
•  Continue to build on our 

commitment to strategic pro bono 
partnerships that align with clients; 

•   continue to invest in community 
giving and grants to health and 
medical research organisations; and

•   increase our investment in 

community partnerships and 
engagement.

Environmental Responsibility 
Slater and Gordon Group recognises 
that it has an obligation to reduce 
the Company’s impact on the 
environment and to imbed sustainable 
work practices. In line with the legal 
services industry, Slater and Gordon 
Group has assessed its major impact 
areas and areas for reduction as:  
paper usage, energy usage, waste  
and travel.

Work on reducing our environmental 
impacts has progressed in Australia  
in FY15 through the Company’s 
membership of the Australian Legal 
Sector Alliance, an industry-led 
association working to promote 
sustainable practices across the legal 
sector. For example, we used the 
AusLSA’s carbon consumption 
calculator to measure our annual 
performance and the progress 
we are making in reducing our carbon 
emissions. Further, Australian staff 
contributed ideas and solutions  
to reduce environmental impacts 
through the Company’s Environmental 
Committee. 

FY15 Highlights
•   Despite our continued growth in 

Australia, we recorded a decrease 
in our per capita carbon emissions. 
This achievement is mainly due to 
a commitment to energy saving 
initiatives, which has cut our 
electricity usage;

•   the completion of an environment 
management system to inform 
and drive the process of reducing 
emissions in Australia; and

•  the implementation of a 

consolidated data collection and 
reporting framework to understand 
the breadth of environmental 
impacts in the UK.

FY16 Priorities
In FY16, our priority is to improve the 
internal and external reporting on our 
key impact areas.

11

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  Board of Directors and Company Secretary

Experience
John has been on the Board since 2010 and 
has been Chair of the Board since 2012.

John has over 30 years’ experience as a 
chartered accountant and was the former 
Executive Finance Director of Harvey 
Norman Holdings Ltd. John brings to the 
Board extensive financial, public company 
and retail experience and skills in financial 
management, general management, 
mergers and acquisitions and strategy.

Other Current Directorships
Non-Executive Director of Flexigroup 
Limited (appointed November 2006).

Non-Executive Director of Super Retail 
Group Ltd (appointed September 2008).

Former Directorships
Previous Non-Executive Director of 
Emerging Leaders Investment Ltd  
(2010–2014).

Special Responsibilities
Chair – Board (current).

Member – Audit, Compliance and Risk 
Management Committee (current).

Chair – Nomination Committee 
(appointed 1 July 2015).

Member – Nomination and Remuneration 
Committee (ceased 30 June 2015).

Experience
Andrew joined Slater and Gordon in 
1994 and was appointed as Managing 
Director in 2000 and Group Managing 
Director on 1 July 2014. Before being 
appointed Managing Director in 2000, 
Andrew worked in most of Slater and 
Gordon’s litigation practice areas, working 
across both high profile class actions and 
individual compensation claims. Andrew 
brings to the Board extensive experience as 
a legal practitioner and law firm manager.

Other Current Directorships
None.

Former Directorships 
None.

Other Positions
Previous founding chair of the Youth 
Junction Incorporated, a not for profit 
youth charity operating in Sunshine, 
Victoria (2005–2010).

Member of the Board of the Youth 
Junction Incorporated (appointed  
2005 – current).

Member of the Advisory Council of the 
Melbourne Law School (2014 – current).

Special Responsibilities
Group Managing Director.

John Skippen
Chair, Non-Executive Director
ACA

Andrew Grech
Group Managing Director
LLB MAICD

12

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  Experience
Ken was appointed a Director of the 
Company in 2003.

Ken has extensive litigation experience 
particularly in claims for sufferers of 
asbestos related illness (including acting 
for the Australian Council of Trade 
Unions (ACTU) and asbestos support 
groups in negotiations with James 
Hardie) and large, multi-party group and 
representative actions. Ken brings to the 
Board a unique operational perspective 
in a number of the Group’s key strategic 
areas. As an Australian legal practitioner 
with close to 20 years’ experience and 
qualifications and a strong interest in 
economics and business management, Ken 
contributes skills in legal practice, legal 
practice management, risk management, 

financial analysis, financial reporting 
and mergers and acquisitions. Ken was 
appointed Head of Australia in July 2013 
and until May 2015 was responsible for 
the overall management of the Slater and 
Gordon Australian operation. In May 
2015 Ken became the Managing Director, 
UK and Europe for Slater and Gordon 
incorporating Slater and Gordon Solutions.

Other Current Directorships
None.

Former Directorships
None.

Special Responsibilities
Managing Director – UK and Europe.

equity and the property sector. Ian was 
inaugural president of the Australian 
Institute of Superannuation Trustees 
(AIST). Prior executive positions include 
CEO of Development Australia Funds 
Management Ltd (1998–2004) and 
Executive Chair of Cbus (1992–1998). 
Earlier in his career he was a senior 
industrial officer with the ACTU (1982–
1992). Ian brings to the Board expertise 
and skills in finance, financial markets, 
business strategy, human resources, risk 
management and corporate governance.

Other Current Directorships
Non-Executive Director of AssetCo 
Management Pty Ltd as management 
company for SSSR Holdings Pty Ltd 
(Southern Cross Station)(Appointed 
November 2007), Praeco Pty Ltd (HQ 
Joint Operations Command)(Appointed 
November 2009), Western Liberty Group 
Holdings Pty Ltd (Perth District Court 
Complex)(Appointed March 2011). 
He also holds pro-bono positions as:
Chair of ACTU Member Connect Pty 
Ltd (Appointed July 2004) and Chair of 
Renewable Energy Development Trust 
(Appointed in 2007).

Former Directorships 
Non-Executive Director of Victorian Funds 
Management Corporation (2006–2012).

Epic Energy Holdings Pty Ltd (2007–2011).

Pacific Hydro Ltd (2004–2007).

Federal Airports Corporation (1986–1994).

Utilities of Australia Pty Ltd (2000–2006).

Bennelong Funds Management Pty Ltd 
(2006–2008).

Ecogen Holdings Pty Ltd (2003–2004).

Australian Venture Capital Association Ltd 
(2003–2005) and ISPT Pty Ltd (1994–1998).

Other Current Positions
Chair of the IFM Investors Investor 
Advisory Board (appointed May 2004).

Special Responsibilities
Chair – Audit, Compliance and Risk 
Management Committee (current).

Member – Remuneration Committee 
(appointed 1 July 2015).

Member – Nomination and Remuneration 
Committee (ceased 30 June 2015).

Ken Fowlie
Executive Director
LLB BCom (NSW) 
MSc (with distinction) (LBS)
MAICD

Ian Court
Non-Executive Director
FAICD

Experience
Ian was appointed a Director of the 
Company in 2007.

Ian has extensive experience as a senior 
executive and Non-Executive Director 
in a diverse range of companies and 
industry sectors, including financial 
services, unlisted infrastructure, 
listed energy, superannuation, private 

13

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  Board of Directors and Company Secretary (continued)

listed and non-listed environments and 
public and private sectors. She is an 
experienced member of audit committees 
and has chaired Nomination and 
Remuneration and IT Committees.

In addition to Board appointments, Erica 
consults extensively in the public and 
private sectors at CEO and Board level on 
a range of business issues. In an executive 
capacity, Erica held senior positions in 
finance, funds management and insurance 
at the ANZ bank and worked with 
international consultancy firms.

Other Current Directorships
None.

Former Directorships 
Wilsons Investment Management 
HTM (ASX: WIG) – Member, Audit/
Risk and Nomination and Remuneration 
Committees (2013–2014).

Victorian Funds Management Corporation 
(2002–2009) – Chair, Nomination and 

Remuneration Committee and Member, 
Audit/Risk and Investment Committees.

Eastern Health (2000–2004) – Chair, 
IT Committee and Member, Audit/Risk 
Committee.

Ilhan Food Allergy Foundation  
(2007–2010). 

Other Positions
Founder of AnaphylaxiStop, a social 
enterprise supporting medical research 
into food allergies (appointed 2006).

Director, Erica Lane & Associates Pty Ltd 
(appointed January 2004).

Special Responsibilities
Chair – Remuneration Committee 
(appointed 1 July 2015).

Member – Audit, Compliance and Risk 
Management Committee (current).

Chair – Nomination and Remuneration 
Committee (ceased 30 June 2015).

received several industry achievements 
including the award for the Victorian 
Telstra Business Woman of the Year  
in 1999.

Other Current Directorships
Non-Executive Director, Catapult Group 
International Ltd (appointed September 
2014).

Non-Executive Director, MTAA 
Superannuation Fund Pty Limited 
(appointed May 2015).

Other Current Positions
Current Member, RMIT Council 
(appointed in September 2008).

Strategy Consultant – DB Results 
(current).

Other Former Positions
Previous Chairman and President, Novell 
Asia Pacific (2001–2007).

Previous Chairman, Victorian Government 
Purchasing Board (2005–2011).

Executive Director, O’Donnell Global 
Solutions Pty Ltd (appointed August 2009).

Previous Chairman, Advisory Board Insync 
(2011–2015).

Former Directorships 
Non-Executive Director, RMIT Vietnam 
(2011–2015).

Non-Executive Director, RMIT Training 
(2010–2015).

Managing Director, Cambridge 
Technology Partners (2000–2003).

Managing Director, Global Customer 
Solutions (GCS)(a subsidiary of TXU  
(now TRU Energy)(1998–2000).

Special Responsibilities
Member – Audit, Compliance and Risk 
Management Committee (current).

Member – Remuneration Committee 
(appointed 1 July 2015).

Member – Nomination Committee 
(appointed 1 July 2015).

Member – Nomination and Remuneration 
Committee (ceased 30 June 2015).

Erica Lane
Non-Executive Director
B App Sc, Grad Dip Comp, MBA 
(Melbourne), MBA (Chicago), MAICD

Experience
Erica joined the Board of the Company in 
2008. Since 2000, she has held various 
appointments in funds management, 
investment management, professional 
services and healthcare spanning both 

Rhonda O’Donnell
Non-Executive Director
M App Sc, MBA (Melbourne)

Experience
Rhonda joined the Board of the Company 
in 2013.

Rhonda has extensive experience in 
international and local industries including 
telecommunications, information 
technology, education, government and 
utilities. Rhonda has been a successful 
executive and board member in both the 
private and public sectors. Rhonda has 

14

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
Experience
Wayne commenced as Chief Financial 
Officer and Company Secretary of Slater 
and Gordon in 2004. Prior to joining Slater 
and Gordon, Wayne was the Financial 
Controller of Grand Hotel Group (an ASX 
listed property trust) and prior to that, 
Wayne worked at Arthur Andersen for  
10 years where he specialised in corporate 
recovery, insolvency and restructuring. 
Wayne contributes skills in corporate 
governance, financial management, 
analysis and reporting.

Experience
Kirsten commenced as a commercial 
litigator with Slater and Gordon in 
2006 and then as General Counsel and 
Company Secretary in 2008. In August 
2015, Kristen has taken up the role as 
General Counsel for Slater and Gordon 
Group UK. Prior to joining Slater and 
Gordon, Kirsten was a lawyer at Allens 
Arthur Robinson and completed an 
Associateship to the Hon. Justice Hargrave 
in the Victorian Supreme Court. Kirsten 
contributes skills in commercial law and 
corporate governance.

Wayne Brown
Group Chief Financial Officer and
Joint Company Secretary
BCom (Hons), M Int Bus (Melbourne),
CA MAICD

Kirsten Morrison
General Counsel and Joint  
Company Secretary
BA/LLB (Hons)
Grad. Dip. Applied Corporate Governance

Corporate Governance
The Board of the Company recognises that a genuine commitment to sound principles of corporate governance is 
fundamental to the sustainability of the Company and its performance. The Corporate Governance Statement for the 
reporting period ending 30 June 2015 can be found on the Company’s website at www.slatergordon.com.au/the-firm/
governance, together with the Company’s Corporate Governance Policies. The Company complies with the ASX Corporate 
Governance Council’s Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations (3rd Edition), which is reflected in its 
Corporate Governance Statement.

15

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  Operating and Financial Review

1. Operations
Overview 
The Slater and Gordon Group is a 
leading provider of consumer legal 
services in Australia and the United 
Kingdom (UK). The firm provides 
specialist legal services in two main 
segments of consumer law – Personal 
Injury Law (motor vehicle accidents, 
workers compensation and civil 
liability) and General Law (family 
law, conveyancing, wills, estate 
planning, business and specialised 
litigation, class actions). Slater and 
Gordon Group became the world’s 
first listed law firm in 2007 and after 
successfully pursuing a strategy 
of geographic and practice area 
diversification in Australia expanded 
into the UK in 2012. In FY15 the 
firm completed the A$1.3 billion 
acquisition of Quindell’s Professional 
Service Division, a leading PIL service 
provider in the UK, which it has 
rebranded as Slater Gordon Solutions.

Business Model 
Our mission is to give people easier 
access to world class legal services. 
We do this by using our competence 
in brand building and process 
engineering to build operations of 
scale and capability that provide 
highly specialised services with a great 
deal of price certainty for clients. 

Revenue
Revenue is generated from providing 
legal services to tens of thousands 
of clients across Australia and the 
UK and is not reliant on any one 
key customer or case outcome. On 
the contrary, as at 30 June 2015, 
the Group was acting on behalf of 
approximately 200,000 individual 
clients. In FY15 approximately 
80% of revenue was derived from 
Personal Injury Law. Most of this 

work is performed on a conditional 
fee basis (No Win – No Fee™) where 
legal fees are paid on the successful 
conclusion of a client’s matter. In line 
with Australian accounting standards 
(AASB 118), PIL revenue is recognised 
using the stage of completion method. 
Recognising revenue on this basis 
gives rise to a corresponding asset in 
the balance sheet – work in progress 
(WIP) that represents the value of 
work completed but unbilled at the 
end of the period or deferred income.  
The majority of General Law work is 
conducted on a fee for service basis.

Costs
The largest component of operating 
costs are salaries and employee 
benefits. There are also material 
marketing and advertising expenses to 
support the Slater and Gordon Group 
suite of brands, with brand awareness 
being the key driver of client enquiries.

Assets and Liabilities 
The significant items in our balance 
sheet are: WIP – representing 
the value of work completed but 
unbilled, Receivables – including 
trade receivables and disbursements 
to support a client matter that are 
reimbursed at settlement, Intangible 
assets – generated by acquisitions, 
Payables – including trade payables 
and legal creditors where Slater 
and Gordon has arranged deferred 
conditional payment terms on  
behalf of the client in relation to  
the disbursements incurred on  
a client matter.

Financial Performance
Slater and Gordon Group delivered 
a strong financial performance in the 
twelve months ending June 2015 with 
our core practice areas performing 
well and delivering revenue, EBITDA 

and cash flow in line with previous 
management guidance. Net Profit 
after income tax increased 22.8%  
to A$83.8 million.

There are three metrics that are key  
to understanding the Group’s results. 
These are provided in the table below.

The consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income contains a 
number of transactions which we have 
normalised to provide greater clarity 
to the underlying operational results.

The normalisation items for FY15 and 
the FY14 comparative period are:

i.  Gain from bargain purchase of 
$58.9 million (2014 restated:  
$19.8 million) resulting from 
the change in accounting policy 
in relation to the treatment of 
deferred consideration under  
AASB 3 Business Combinations and 
the re-classification of the Leo Abse 
and Cohen discount on acquisition;

ii. Discount on acquisition relating 
to Nowicki Carbone, Bannister 
Law and Walker Smith Way and 
recognised as WIP movement of 
$9.3 million;

iii. The corresponding payments 

to former owners $25.4 million 
reclassified as remuneration under 
the new accounting treatment 
for deferred consideration under 
AASB3 Business Combinations;

iv. Costs relating to acquisitions 
of $25.0 million, including an 
amount recognised in Salaries and 
Employee Expense of $1.3 million 
for internal due diligence work 
performed on the acquisition  
of SGS; and

v.  The early termination of a lease  

of $1.6 million.

Total Revenue
EBITDA
Net Profit After Tax (NPAT)

FY15 
$m
627.3
132.4
83.8

FY14 
Restated 
$m
438.2
108.7
68.2

Movements 
$m
189.1
23.7
15.6

16

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  This results in normalised revenue and normalised EBITDA of:

Total revenue per financial statements
Normalisation adjustments:
– Discount on acquisition
– Gain from bargain purchase
Total revenue – normalised
Less interest income (for EBITDA calculation)
Total revenue-normalised less interest income 

Total expenses per financial statements, excluding finance  
costs and depreciation and amortisation expense
Normalisation adjustments
– Payments to former owners
– Acquisition costs
– Onerous lease provision
Normalised expenses
Normalised EBITDA
Normalised EBITDA margin

Note: Data includes one month of SGS.

FY15
$m
627.3

(9.3)
(58.9)
559.1

(3.3)
555.8

FY14  
Restated
$m
438.2

(7.4)
(19.8)
411.0

(1.8)

409.2

(491.6)

(327.7)

25.4
25.0
1.6
(439.6)
116.2
20.9%

9.0
4.1
6.1

(308.5)
100.7
24.6%

Movement 
%
43.2

36.0

15.4

Total Normalised Revenue increased 
by 36.0% in FY15 due to strong 
growth in fee revenue across the 
Group with particularly strong results 
in the UK PIL practice driven by the 
acquisitions of Fentons and Pannone 
in FY14, and Flint Bishop, Leo Abse 
and Cohen and Walker Smith Way 
in FY15. The Australian PIL and GL 
practice groups also benefited from 
the acquisitions of Nowicki Carbone 
and Shultz Toomey O’Brien in the  
first half of FY15.

Normalised EBITDA growth of 15.4% 
is driven by improved contribution 
from PIL in Australia and the UK and 
GL in Australia. EBITDA growth is 
below revenue growth due to the 
expansion into the UK which has lower 
margins than the Australian business 
partly due to case mix and partly due 
to an increased level of marketing and 
business development expenditure 
building the Slater and Gordan  
UK brand.

Segment Performance 

Personal Injury Law – Australia

Overview 
The Australian Personal Injury Law 
(PIL) practice provides expert legal 
services to people in a range of areas 
including motor vehicle accidents, 
workers compensation and civil 

liability law. Most of this work is 
performed on a No Win – No Fee™ 
basis where legal fees are paid on the 
successful conclusion of a client’s 
matter. Slater and Gordon Lawyers  
is the market leader in personal injury 
litigation in Australia with 25% 
market share.

FY15 Highlights
•   The PIL practice performed well, 
demonstrating its resilience with 
strong underlying growth in fee 
revenue (excluding the impact  
of the Queensland practice);

•   the acquisition of Nowicki Carbone 

(Victoria) and Schultz Toomey 
O’Brien (Queensland) in November 
2014 added strength to the 
Australian PIL practice;

•   continued improvement in the client 
intake process and client satisfaction 
scores; and

•   move to a single business in 

Queensland with the migration  
of the Trilby Misso brand across  
to Slater and Gordon Lawyers  
and the co-location of staff.

FY16 Priorities 
•  Business improvement initiatives; 

and 

•  integration of FY15 acquisitions.

Personal Injury Law – UK 

Overview 
The UK Personal Injury Law (PIL) 
practice provides expert legal services 
to claimants in a range of areas 
including motor vehicle accidents, 
employers liability, industrial disease, 
clinical negligence and serious injury 
claims. Most of this work is performed 
on a No Win – No Fee™ basis where 
legal fees are paid on the successful 
conclusion of a client’s matter. 

We also conduct a substantial Court 
of Protection practice which ensures 
that people without the personal 
capacity to make decisions for 
themselves are protected. This trustee 
service is an important adjunct to our 
PIL practice and is complemented 
by a small Financial Planning service 
known as Adroit Financial Services.

Slater and Gordon Lawyers (UK) 
is now a leading personal injury 
litigation firm with work sourced 
primarily from the Slater and Gordon 
Lawyers brand.

17

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  Operating and Financial Review continued

1. Operations continued

FY15 Highlights 
•   The UK PIL practice performed very 
well with emerging brand awareness 
driving strong increases in enquiries, 
file openings and fee income 
nationally;

•   85% of staff now working on 
a common practice and case 
management system with the final 
roll out scheduled for H2 FY16;

•   a sophisticated PIL workflow was 
developed and delivered to fee 
earners; 

•   transition of Manchester based staff 

into a single location; and

•   the acquisition of Walker Smith Way 
and Leo Abse Cohen added strength 
to the UK operations and helped 
build upon our service provision  
to membership organisations.

FY16 Priorities 
•   Continue to build awareness of the 
Slater and Gordon Lawyers brand;

•   further business improvement 

initiatives to deliver operational 
efficiencies; and

•   completion of the IT systems  

roll out.

General Law – Australia

Overview 
The General Law (GL) practice is 
made up of Personal Legal Services 
(PLS) and Business and Specialised 
Litigation Services (B&SLS). 

PLS comprises Family and 
Relationship Law, Conveyancing, 
Wills, Estate Planning and Probate 
practices. Work is predominantly 
performed on a fixed fee basis. B&SLS 
comprises Commercial, Estate, 
Employment and Professional 
Negligence Litigation, Class or Group 
Actions and Criminal Defence work. 
Class actions are largely funded by 
third parties. 

18

FY15 Highlights 
•   The Australian GL practice 

continued to make good progress 
with strong revenue growth across 
the practice groups and improved 
contribution to earnings;

•   B&SLS revenues increased by over 

20% with strong growth in litigation 
work across the practice and the re-
establishment of a pipeline of third 
party funded class action work;

•   successful resolution of the 

Fairbridge Farm class action with 
A$24 million settlement scheme for 
the former residents approved by 
the Supreme Court of NSW;

•   emerging practices (estate, 

professional negligence and criminal 
law) accelerating their growth, 
albeit from a small base; and

•   conveyancing performance stable 

with strong growth outside of 
Queensland.

FY16 Priorities 
•   Broadening the brand to attract  

new clients;

•   continuing to build the third party 

funded class action project pipeline; 
and

•   further investment into the growth 
of the Family Law and emerging 
practice areas.

General Law – UK 

Overview 
The UK General Law (GL) practice 
comprises Business and Specialised 
Litigation Services, Real Estate, 
Crime and Regulation, Personal Legal 
Services, Employment, Reputation 
and Professional Discipline. Slater 
and Gordon Lawyers has the largest 
Family and claimant Employment 
Law practices in the UK. 

FY15 Highlights 
•   Continuing to invest and build 

scale in key areas such as Criminal, 
Employment, Estate Planning, 
Family and Property Law;

•  increased GL presence with FY15 
acquisitions of Walker Smith Way 
and Leo Abse & Cohen; and

•  marketing campaigns in Employment 
and Family Law were well received.

FY16 Priorities 
•   Build on depth of expertise in key 
practice areas to strengthen our 
client offering;

•   expand geographic footprint  

of practice groups; and

•  continue to scale up smaller  
practice groups and optimise 
profitability levels.

Slater Gordon Solutions 

Overview 
Slater and Gordon Group acquired 
a number of business assets from 
Quindell plc in May 2015 which 
were described at the time as the 
Professional Services Division (PSD) 
and have now been rebranded as 
Slater Gordon Solutions (SGS). 

SGS is the leading fast track personal 
injury law service provider in the 
UK, uniquely operating across the 
personal injury claims management 
value chain to provide legal, motor 
and health services.

It is a client focused business with 
systems and processes that have been 
designed to fully service the needs of 
the not at fault party who suffers loss 
or damage from an accident from one 
initial phone call.

The operations can be broken into two 
segments – Claims and Motor and 
Health Services.

The Claims business operates 
across 12 locations employing 
approximately 1,600 staff. It deals 
with the origination, assessment and 
resolution of claims with a focus on 
road traffic accidents.

The Motor Services business provides 
accident management services to 
affinity groups for the benefit of 
road users. The services include 
co-ordination of the provision of 
temporary replacement vehicles  
and automotive repairs.

The Health Services business provides 
rehabilitation and medical reporting 
solutions that may be required as part 
of a personal injury claim.

SGS is also currently progressing a 
portfolio of Noise Induced Hearing 
Loss (NIHL) claims acquired as part  
of the transaction in May.

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  FY16 Priorities 
•   Accelerating and optimising mix  

of RTA resolutions; 

•  resolution of hearing loss claims; 

and

•  engaging with key partners.

2. Financial Position  
and Cash Flow
Cash Flow 
Operating Cash Flow of  
A$40.8 million for FY15 was  
below FY14 due mainly to the 
implementation of a new Practice 
Management System in the UK 
causing a delay in billings and the 
inclusion of a component of the 
SGS acquisition relating to WIP in 
operating cash flows ($7.7 million).

When growing a PIL practice cash 
will trail profit due to the investment 
in WIP that does not convert to 
cash until future periods. As we 
move forward we will be focusing 
on EBITDAW (EBITDA less the 
movement in WIP) as a proxy for  
cash and target Gross Operating  
cash flow to be 100% of EBITDAW.

Net Assets 
The Group’s net assets increased 
significantly in FY15 due to the 
acquisition of SGS in May 2015.  
The acquisition was funded through  
a mix of equity and debt.

The Group raised A$890.9 million 
through a two for three pro rata 
accelerated entitlement offer 
(‘Entitlement Offer’) in April 
2015. Approximately 94.3 million 
new shares were issued under the 
Institutional Offer, 18.8 million shares 
under the Retail Entitlement Offer, 
and 26.7 million shares under the 
Retail Shortfall Bookbuild. Debt was 
drawn down from a new Syndicated 
Debt Facility with the Group’s 
financiers which replaced previous 
funding agreements and a new GBP 
denominated debt facility with the 
Group’s financiers which replaced 
previous funding agreements (see 
further details below).

Debt
At 30 June 2015 gross debt  
was A$720.4 million, net debt  
$623.4 million and gearing (net bank 
debt/equity) 43.4%, slightly above 
our preferred 30–40% band due 
to the SGS transaction. Gearing is 
forecast to be 34% by 30 June 2016. 

During the year the Group entered 
into a new multicurrency (AUD/GBP) 
syndicated bank facility with NAB and 
Westpac. The facility included loan 
facility, bank guarantees and/or letter 
of credit with an overall limit of GBP 
£375 million and AUD $90 million 
with expiry dates between June 2018 
to June 2020. The facility is used to 
settle the previous facility and funding 
the new acquisitions. 

In the balance sheet, foreign currency 
balances are translated at the spot 
rate at the 2014 and 2015 reporting 
dates. 

This subsequently has a foreign 
exchange translation impact upon the 
reported debt balances in a number  
of ways;

i.   Movement in the foreign exchange 
rate from one period to another 
where the exchange rate (or spot 
rate) has changed (i.e. the impact 
the foreign exchange movement  
has on the opening balance); 

ii.  A differential in the exchange rate 

from the cash flow from operations 
for proceeds or repayment of 
borrowings as a result of using an 
average exchange rate. Where 
the proceeds or repayments 
of borrowings is individually 
immaterial, an average foreign 
exchange rate is used, and as such 
there is a translation difference 
between the average rate and the 
year-end exchange rate; and

iii. Where a significant transaction has 
occurred, such as the drawdown of 
borrowings for the Slater Gordon 
Solutions transaction, the cash 
flow translates at the exchange rate 
at the transaction date. As such, 
there is a translation difference for 
the impact of the foreign exchange 
movement between the transaction 
date and the year end exchange rate.

Net operating cash flow
Net assets 
Net debt 
Gearing %
Loan and overdraft facilities – £ denominated facility
Loan and overdraft facilities – A$ denominated facility

FY15
$m
40.8
1435.0
623.4
43.4
£376
A$95

FY14
$m
Restated
54.4
418.8
101.1  
24.1
-
$A246

Movements
$m
(13.6)
1016.2
522.3
-
-
-

19

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  Operating and Financial Review continued

2. Financial Position and Cash Flow continued

To highlight these movements, based upon the 2015 financial accounts, the reconciliation of the opening debt to closing 
debt is as follows:

Gross debt at 30 June 2014

Proceeds from borrowings
Repayment of borrowings
Implied gross debt at 30 June 2015
Reported gross debt at 30 June 2015
Difference due to foreign exchange difference

The difference due to foreign exchange made up from the following:

Movement in the foreign exchange rate from period
Differential in exchange rate from using an average foreign exchange rate for the year compared  
to the rate at 30 June 2015
Movement in exchange rate from 29 May 2015 to 30 June 2015 on proceeds of borrowings for  
Slater Gordon Solutions acquisition

$AUD M

$126.3
$594.1
($44.0)
$676.4
(720.4)
($44.0)

$AUD M
$11.0

$21.0

$12.0

Dividends 
Directors declared a final dividend 
of 5.5 cents per share, franked to 
40% and a 10% increase on FY14 
in line with our stated policy of 
increasing dividends 10% annually. 
As a result, 31.8% of FY15 NPAT will 
be distributed to shareholders as an 
interim and final dividend. 

Off Balance Sheet Items 
The opening FY16 balance sheet for 
SGS does not include a value for WIP 
associated with the portfolio of NIHL 
cases acquired as part of the SGS 
acquisition. Once we have stronger 
evidence in relation to the trajectory 
of the NIHL cases we expect to  
revisit the balance sheet and book  
an appropriate value for the WIP. 

3. Business Strategy, 
Outlook and Risks
Business Strategy
The Group’s core strategy is to lead 
the consolidation of the consumer 
legal services market in Australia and 
the United Kingdom and to participate 
in adjacent markets where to do  
so complements its core legal  
services offering. 

Having acquired significant business 
assets in both Australia and the UK, 
the Group seeks to enable its strategy 
through a focus on client satisfaction, 
staff engagement and operational 
effectiveness. Having established 
critical mass in both markets in which 
it operates, the Group is levering 
its available assets and delivering 
sustainable shareholder returns 
through a business strategy built 
on organic growth and operational 
improvement. From an operational 
perspective, this involves the 
continued strengthening of the 
Group’s current market leading 
position in the consumer law market 
as well as optimising the business 
performance of its assets including 
the recently acquired businesses 
operating under the Slater Gordon 
Solutions brand.

Outlook
We have confidence in the future 
of both Slater and Gordon Lawyers 
and Slater Gordon Solutions. With 
a commanding market share lead 
in both Australia and the UK and 
free from the demands of near term 
acquisition activity, we will be able 
to focus our efforts on continuing to 
improve operating effectiveness.

The Directors remain convinced of 
the strategic merit of taking a leading 
position in both the Australian and UK 
consumer legal services markets. The 
momentum for further consolidation 
in both markets remains strong and 
the Group is well placed to take 
advantage of that trajectory given  
its position, brand strength and  
the breadth of offering. 

Undoubtedly, the Group will face 
headwinds at various times connected 
with the ongoing integration 
activities that it will undertake to 
fully leverage the assets available to 
it and associated with the inevitable 
maturing of the Group, but the Group 
is actively taking steps to mitigate 
these risks. 

20

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  •   Client service and professional 

standards compliance: Delivery of 
consistent and quality legal services 
is the cornerstone of our business 
and our reputation is based upon 
this. High professional standards 
and compliance with legal services 
regulatory regimes is central to 
our risk management strategy. The 
Company establishes its professional 
standards in its Values and National 
Practice Standards in Australia and 
the United Kingdom(NPS), which 
are implemented through training 
and workflow management. NPS 
tracking and audits, centralised 
claims and complaints handling 
and practice improvement plans 
ensure professional standards are 
monitored and maintained.

•   People and Culture: People are 
the most critical asset of any 
professional services business. 
Initiatives to ensure employees 
are engaged and productive 
include Values, policies, diversity 
and flexibility, learning and 
development, the Group’s 
remuneration strategy (Rewarding 
You Fairly) effective work, 
health and safety policies, M&A 
integration strategy, and regular 
engagement monitoring. 

Risks
During FY16, the Group will 
undertake a materiality assessment 
process which specifically understands 
and assesses material sustainability 
risks. With the above context, we 
make the following disclosure of 
material economic, social and 
environmental sustainability risks 
which the Company has under  
active management: 

•   Competition and market share:  

The Company operates in a 
competitive and innovative 
environment. Changes in the 
competitor landscape, including 
disruptive innovation could drive 
changes to market share. Strategic 
planning, investment in R&D, KPIs 
to promote leadership of innovation, 
M&A strategy and acquisition 
integration planning are activities 
we undertake to protect and grow 
our market share. 

•   Regulatory change: Legislative 
reform could have an adverse 
material impact on the Group, 
particularly in relation to personal 
injury litigation services. Effective 
government relations, management 
KPIs, modelling the potential 
impact and diversification into new 
services and markets are initiatives 
we use to monitor, manage and 
protect against potential regulatory 
changes. 

•   Financial Management: Financial 

and cost management, particularly 
labour costs, is critical to managing 
and improving gross margin in a 
legal business. The Company has 
established a mature remuneration 
and reward strategy, manages its 
labour mix and incorporates labour 
budgeting in the strategic planning 
process. The Company also has 
budgeting and forecasting systems 
in place to ensure sound financial 
management and regularly reviews 
overhead expenditure. 

21

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  Financial Statements

Directors’ Report  

Auditor’s Independence Declaration  

Consolidated Statement of Profit or  
Loss and Other Comprehensive Income  

Consolidated Statement  
of Financial Position  

Consolidated Statement  
of Changes in Equity  

Consolidated Statement  
of Cash Flows  

Notes to the Financial Statements  

Slater and Gordon Limited  
Directors’ Declaration  

Independent Auditor’s Report  

Additional ASX Information  

Corporate Directory  

23

65

66

67

68

69

70

136

137

139

140

22

Slater and Gordon Limited  

  Annual Report 2015

Directors’ Report  

The  directors  present  their  report,  together  with  the  financial  report  of  the  consolidated  entity  consisting  of  Slater  and 
Gordon Limited (“the Company”) and its controlled entities (jointly referred to as “the Group”), for the financial year ended 
30  June  2015  and  the  auditor’s  report  thereon.  This  financial  report  has  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  Australian 
Accounting  Standards.  Compliance  with  Australian  Accounting  Standards  ensures  compliance  with  International 
Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”). 

Directors 
The directors in office at any time during the financial year and up to the date of this report are: 

Ian Court 

•  John Skippen – Chair 
•  Andrew Grech – Group Managing Director 
• 
•  Ken Fowlie – Managing Director (UK & Europe) 
•  Erica Lane 
•  Rhonda O’Donnell 

Details of the skills, experience, expertise and special responsibilities of each director are set out in a subsequent section 
of this report. 

Principal Activities 
The  principal  activity  of  the  Group  during  the  financial  year  was  the  operation  of  legal  practices  in  Australia  and  the 
United  Kingdom  (“UK”).  Following  the  acquisition  of  various  business  assets  from  Quindell  Plc  on  29  May  2015  which 
have  now  been  rebranded  as  Slater  Gordon  Solutions  (“SGS”),  activities  have  expanded  to  include  other  services 
complementary to the processing and resolution of personal injury claims in the UK.  Full details of the activities of SGS 
are separately disclosed in the Directors’ Report. 

Results 
The profit after income tax of the Group was $83.8 million (2014 restated: $68.2 million). 

Review of Operations 
The Group continued to deliver strong financial results during the year ended 30 June 2015, at the same time making 
solid progress against key strategic priorities, in particular the expansion of its UK operations.  

The Group ended the year with total revenue of $627.3 million (2014 restated: $438.2 million) and net profit after tax of 
$83.8  million  (2014  restated:  $68.2  million).  The  full  year  dividend  was  up  12.5%  over  the  prior  year  to  9.0  cents  per 
share partially franked at 40% (2014: 8.0 cents per share fully franked).  

The Australian business completed the acquisitions of Nowicki Carbone, a personal injury law practice based in Victoria, 
and Schultz Toomey O’Brien, a consumer law practice in Queensland, on 31 October 2014, which continue to reinforce 
the growth of the Group as the leader in consumer law in Australia. 

Legislation in South Australia changed with effect from 1 July 2014 to allow for incorporated legal practices to operate in 
South  Australia.  As  a  consequence,  the  Adelaide  practice  was  transferred  from  Andrew  Grech  trading  as  Slater  and 
Gordon Lawyers to the Company for the value of the practice’s net assets on 30 September 2014. The net asset value 
was fully offset by amounts owed to the Company pursuant to the service and license agreement between the Company 
and Andrew Grech. 

During the financial year, the UK business devoted significant focus to consolidate the acquisitions completed during the 
course of FY14 into the existing operations, an exercise that involved both a relocation of the practices formerly known 
as Russell Jones and Walker and Pannone to one office in Manchester with the staff from the firm, formerly known as 
Fentons, to relocate shortly. The transition of the entities acquired prior to FY15 onto one Practice Management System 
and  Case  Management  System,  was  substantially  completed  during  the  year.  In  addition  to  the  acquisition  of Walker 
Smith Way and Leo Abse Cohen in April and May 2015 respectively, the Group also completed the acquisition of SGS. 
The principal activities of SGS are: 

I. 

II. 

First notification of loss (“FNOL”) services for various partner organisations, including insurance brokers, insurers, 
motoring  organisations  and  vehicle  manufacturers.    These  services  include  the  facilitation  of  vehicle  retrieval, 
repair and replacement vehicle hire for not at fault drivers; 
Conducting claims on behalf of not at fault parties to road traffic accidents (“RTA”), including credit hire, repair and 
personal injury claims. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 2 

23

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
Directors’ Report 

Review of Operations (continued) 
III. 

Conducting  claims  on  behalf  of  individuals  injured  in  the  course  of  employment  or  in  a  public  place  (“EL/PL”).  
One  species  of employers’  liability claim  that  SGS  is currently  conducting  are  personal  injury  claims  for  a  large 
group of people who allege noise induced hearing loss (“NIHL”) as a consequence of employment and who may 
be entitled to compensation as a result.  It is expected that these NIHL claims will be concluded in the next 1 to 3 
years; and 
Services complementary to these claims processes, including: 
A medical reporting service for claimant lawyers; 
a. 
The assessment, triage and facilitation of rehabilitation services for not at fault parties injured in accidents; 
b. 
and 
A costing service for lawyers and law firms. 

c. 

IV. 

On  5  August  2015,  Quindell  Plc,  the  vendor  of  SGS,  published  qualified  financial  statements  in  which  the  current 
directors and auditors of Quindell Plc explained, inter alia, that relevant information relating to transactions entered into 
by  the  former  directors  that  could  impact  on  the  accounting,  intention,  commercial  purpose  or  value  of  certain 
transactions was not available to them.  

On 5 August 2015 the Serious Fraud Office in the United Kingdom advised that it has opened a criminal investigation into 
the business and accounting practices of Quindell Plc.   

The acquisition of SGS was structured as an acquisition of the various entities rather than an acquisition of the common 
stock of Quindell Plc.  Moreover, Quindell Plc provided detailed warranties to the Company in relation to the operations 
of the assets comprising SGS.  Those warranties are secured by a Warranty Escrow account holding £50m.   

The Directors are confident that the Company has no liability as a result of the matters described above. 

In  the  course  of  preparing  these  financial  statements,  the  Directors  have  sought  to  identify,  understand  and  properly 
account for all relevant prior transactions undertaken by entities within SGS. Despite reasonable inquiries, including of 
current directors of Quindell Plc, the Directors are unable to identify or rationalise every historic transaction undertaken 
by  the  former  directors  of  the  various  entities  and  have  made  fair  value  adjustments  as  appropriate.  The  Directors 
believe that none of the known transactions relate to the fundamental business activities or economics of SGS and none 
of the known transactions are material in value or effect. 

Significant Changes in the State of Affairs 
In  April  2015  the  Group  raised  additional  funds  through  a  2  for  3  pro  rata  accelerated  entitlement  offer  (“Entitlement 
Offer”).  Approximately 94.3 million new shares were issued under the Institutional Offer, 18.8 million shares under the 
Retail  Entitlement  Offer,  and  26.7  million  shares  under  the  Retail  Shortfall  Bookbuild.    The  total  sum  raised  of  $890.9 
million  funded  the  acquisition  of  SGS,  along  with  drawdowns  from  a  new  Syndicated  Debt  Facility  with  the  Group’s 
financiers  which  replaced  previous  funding  agreements  and  a  new  GBP  denominated  debt  facility  with  the  Group’s 
financiers which replaced previous funding agreements. 

The  new  Syndicated  Debt  Facility  included  loan  facilities  with  three  and  five  year  terms  with  overall  limits  of  £375.0 
million and $90.0 million. At 30 June 2015 the net bank debt was $623.4 million with a gearing ratio (net bank debt to 
/equity) of 43.0%.  

The  Group  introduced  in  the  financial  period  a  broad-based  ‘share saver’  offer  to  all  employees  and  a  new  Employee 
Equity  Incentive  Plan  (“EIP”)  which  was  approved  by  shareholders  at  the  2014  Annual  General  Meeting  (“AGM”). 
Subsequent to the AGM, offers were made to all employees in Australia and the United Kingdom to take up $500 or £375 
of equity respectively, with the Company matching the allocation on a 1 for 1 basis.  Offers were taken up by around 800 
employees across the organisation, representing approximately 40% of eligible employees. 

Under the terms of the EIP, performance rights offers were extended to executives in October 2014 and December 2014. 
All  executives  across  the  Group  have  accepted  the  offers.    Overall,  496,000  performance  rights  have  been  issued  to 
executives throughout the Group, including a shareholder approved allocation of 56,000 performance rights (combined) 
to executive directors.  Performance rights vest based on a three year service condition and the financial performance of 
the Australian PIL, Australian GL, UK PIL, UK GL or Group operations (depending on the executive role) over the three 
financial years FY15 to FY17.  Performance measures include total shareholder return and earnings measures.   

The EIP replaces the existing Employee Ownership Plan (“EOP”), without prejudice to the rights of current participants in 
the  EOP.    Vesting  of  equity  interests  under  the  EOP  continues  based  on  performance  in  FY15  and  the  repayment  of 
loans associated with the EOP will continue throughout FY16 to FY18.  

24

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 3 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
Directors’ Report 

Significant Changes in the State of Affairs (continued) 
Other than the acquisitions during FY15 otherwise referred to in this report, and the above mentioned changes in capital 
structure and the introduction of the EIP, there have been no significant changes in the affairs of the Group that require 
disclosure in this report. 

Events Subsequent to Reporting Date 
Subsequent to the end of the financial year, all unvested Vesting Convertible Redeemable (“VCR”) ordinary shares at 30 
June  2015  have  either  vested  and  converted  into  ordinary  shares  (subject  to  disposal  restrictions)  or  have  been 
approved for redemption.  Other than the aforementioned, there have not been any matters or circumstances that have 
significantly affected, or may significantly affect, the results reported in the financial statements. 

Likely Developments 
With a commanding market share lead in both Australia and the UK, the group is free from the demands of near term 
future acquisition activity and will focus its efforts on improvement of operating effectiveness. 

Having acquired significant businesses in both Australia and the UK, and established critical mass in the personal injury 
law market, the Group will focus its resources to deliver sustainable shareholder returns through a business strategy built 
on organic growth. 

From an operational perspective, this involves the continued strengthening of the Group’s current market leading position 
in the consumer law market. This will include further investment in its finance and IT infrastructure and the progressive 
integration of the newly acquired operations of Slater Gordon Solutions. 

The Directors remain convinced of the strategic merit of taking a leading position in both the Australian and UK consumer 
legal  services  markets.  The  momentum  for  further  consolidation  in  both  markets  remains  strong  and  the  Group  is 
extremely well placed to take advantage of that trajectory given its position, brand strength and the breadth of its offering.   

Environmental Regulation 
The Group’s operations are not subject to any significant environmental regulations or laws in Australia and the UK. 

Dividend Paid, Recommended and Declared 
The dividends paid and declared since the start of the financial year are as follows: 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 

Dividends on ordinary shares  

Interim dividend partially franked (40%) at the tax rate of 30% for 2015: 3.50 cents 
per share (2014: 3.00 cents per share, fully franked) 

7,341 

6,115 

Final fully franked dividend at the tax rate of 30% for 2014: 5.00 cents per share 
(2013: 3.85 cents per share, fully franked)  

10,279 

17,620 

7,655 

13,770 

In addition to the above dividends, since the end of the financial year the directors have recommended the payment of a 
final  ordinary  dividend  of  $19,289,594  franked  to  40%  (5.50  cents  per  share)  to  be  paid  on  29  October  2015  out  of 
retained profits at 30 June 2015.  

Dividend Reinvestment Plan 
Since  27  February  2013,  the  Company  has  had  in  place  a  Dividend  Reinvestment  Plan  (“DRP”)  to  allow  eligible 
shareholders to reinvest their dividends in further Company shares. The DRP was active for the final dividend declared 
for the financial year ended 30 June 2014 and the interim and final dividends declared for the financial year ended 30 
June  2015.  Under  the  DRP,  160,676  shares  were  issued  for  the  2014  final  dividend  at  $6.01  per  share  and  97,043 
shares were issued for the 2015 interim dividend at $7.50 per share. 

Share Options 
No options over unissued shares or interests in the Company were granted during or since the end of the financial year 
and there were no options outstanding at the end of the financial year.  

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 4 

25

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
    
 
 
Directors’ Report 

An equity incentive plan (“EIP”) was established in November 2014 to provide annual equity incentives to selected senior 
executives.  Pursuant  to  the  EIP  496,000  performance  rights  were  granted  which  are  subject  to  vesting  performance 
hurdles and continuing service (refer to page 57 for further discussion) 

Indemnification and Insurance of Directors and Officers and Auditors 
During  the  financial  year,  the  Group  has  given  indemnity  or  entered  an  agreement  to  indemnify,  and  paid  insurance 
premiums as follows: 

A premium of $64,500 (2014: $55,000) for a twelve month period was incurred in respect of directors, officers and the 
company secretary of the Company against a liability brought upon such an officer. 

Further  disclosure  required  under  section  300(9)  of  the  Corporations  Act  2001  is  prohibited  under  the  terms  of  the 
contract. 

Slater and Gordon has not, during or since the financial year, indemnified or agreed to indemnify the auditor of Slater and 
Gordon against a liability incurred as auditor. 

26

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 5 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Information on Directors and Company Secretaries 
The skills, experience, expertise and special responsibilities of each person who has been a director of the Company at 
any time during or since the end of the financial year is provided below, together with details of the company secretaries 
as at the year end. 

John Skippen 
ACA 
Chair 
Non-Executive Director 

Experience 
John has been on the Board since 2010 and has been Chair of the Board since 2012. 

John  has  over  30  years’  experience  as  a  chartered  accountant  and  was  the  former 
Executive  Finance  Director  of  Harvey  Norman  Holdings  Ltd.  John  brings  to  the  Board 
extensive  financial,  public  company  and  retail  experience  and  skills  in  financial 
management, general management, mergers and acquisitions and strategy. 

Other current directorships 
Non-Executive Director of Flexigroup Limited (appointed November 2006) 
Non-Executive Director of Super Retail Group Ltd (appointed September 2008)  

Former directorships 
Previous Non-Executive Director of Emerging Leaders Investment Ltd (2010-2014) 

Special responsibilities 
Chair – Board (current) 
Member – Audit, Compliance and Risk Management Committee (current) 
Chair – Nomination Committee (appointed 1 July 2015) 
Member – Nomination and Remuneration Committee (ceased 30 June 2015) 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 6 

27

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Information on Directors and Company Secretaries (continued) 

Andrew Grech 
LLB MAICD 
Group Managing Director 

Experience 
Andrew  joined  Slater  and  Gordon  in  1994  and  was  appointed  as  Managing  Director  in 
2000  and  Group  Managing  Director  on  1  July  2014.  Before  being  appointed  Managing 
Director in 2000, Andrew worked in most of Slater and Gordon’s litigation practice areas, 
working across both high profile class actions and individual compensation claims. Andrew 
brings to the Board extensive experience as a legal practitioner and law firm manager. 

Other current directorships 
None 

Former directorships  
None 

Other positions 
Previous  founding  chair  of  the  Youth  Junction  Incorporated,  a  not  for  profit  youth  charity 
operating in Sunshine, Victoria (2005-2010) 
Member of the Board of the Youth Junction Incorporated (appointed 2005 – current) 
Member of the Advisory Council of the Melbourne Law School (2014 – current) 

Special responsibilities 
Group Managing Director 

28

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 7 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Information on Directors and Company Secretaries (continued) 

Ken Fowlie 
LLB BCom (NSW)  
MSc (with distinction) (LBS) 
MAICD 
Executive Director 

Experience 
Ken was appointed a Director of the Company in 2003. 

Ken  has  extensive  litigation  experience  particularly  in  claims  for  sufferers  of  asbestos 
related illness (including acting for the Australian Council of Trade Unions (“ACTU”) and 
asbestos support groups in negotiations with James Hardie) and large, multi-party group 
and representative actions. Ken brings to the Board a unique operational perspective in a 
number of the Group’s key strategic areas. As an Australian legal practitioner with close to 
20 years’ experience and qualifications and a strong interest in economics and business 
management,  Ken  contributes  skills  in  legal  practice,  legal  practice  management,  risk 
management,  financial  analysis,  financial  reporting  and  mergers  and  acquisitions.  Ken 
was appointed Head of Australia in July 2013 and until May 2015 was responsible for the 
overall  management  of  the  Slater  and  Gordon  Australian  operation.    In  May  2015  Ken 
became  the  Managing  Director,  UK  and  Europe  for  Slater  and  Gordon  incorporating 
Slater and Gordon Solutions. 

Other current directorships 
None 

Former directorships  
None 

Special responsibilities 
Managing Director – UK and Europe 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 8 

29

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Information on Directors and Company Secretaries (continued) 

Ian Court 
FAICD 
Non-Executive Director 

Experience 
Ian was appointed a Director of the Company in 2007. 

Ian  has  extensive  experience  as  a  senior  executive  and  non-executive  director  in  a 
diverse  range  of  companies  and  industry  sectors,  including  financial  services,  unlisted 
infrastructure,  listed  energy,  superannuation,  private  equity  and  the  property  sector.  Ian 
was  inaugural  president  of  the  Australian  Institute  of  Superannuation  Trustees  (“AIST”).  
Prior executive positions include CEO of Development Australia Funds Management Ltd 
(1998-2004)  and  Executive  Chair  of  Cbus  (1992-1998).    Earlier  in  his  career  he  was  a 
senior industrial officer with the ACTU (1982-1992). Ian brings to the Board expertise and 
skills in finance, financial markets, business strategy, human resources, risk management 
and corporate governance. 

Other current directorships 
Non-Executive  Director  of  AssetCo  Management  Pty  Ltd  as  management  company  for 
SSSR Holdings Pty Ltd (Southern Cross Station) (Appointed November 2007), 
Praeco Pty Ltd (HQ Joint Operations Command) (Appointed November 2009), 
Western Liberty Group Holdings Pty Ltd (Perth District Court Complex) (Appointed March 
2011).  
He also holds pro-bono positions as: 
Chair of ACTU Member Connect Pty Ltd (Appointed July 2004) and  
Chair of Renewable Energy Development Trust (Appointed in 2007). 

Former directorships  
Non-Executive Director of Victorian Funds Management Corporation (2006-2012) 
Epic Energy Holdings Pty Ltd (2007-2011) 
Pacific Hydro Ltd (2004-2007) 
Federal Airports Corporation (1986-1994) 
Utilities of Australia Pty Ltd (2000-2006) 
Bennelong Funds Management Pty Ltd (2006-2008) 
Ecogen Holdings Pty Ltd (2003-2004) 
Australian Venture Capital Association Ltd (2003-2005) and ISPT Pty Ltd (1994-1998) 

Other current positions 
Chair of the IFM Investors Investor Advisory Board (appointed May 2004)  

Special responsibilities 
Chair – Audit, Compliance and Risk Management Committee (current) 
Member – Remuneration Committee (appointed 1 July 2015) 
Member – Nomination and Remuneration Committee (ceased 30 June 2015) 

30

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 9 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Information on Directors and Company Secretaries (continued) 

Erica Lane 
B App Sc, Grad Dip Comp, 
MBA (Melbourne), 
MBA (Chicago),  
MAICD 
Non-Executive Director 

Experience 
Erica  joined  the  Board  of  the  Company  in  2008.  Since  2000,  she  has  held  various 
appointments  in  funds  management,  investment  management,  professional  services  and 
healthcare  spanning  both  listed  and  non-listed  environments  and  public  and  private 
sectors. She is an experienced member of audit committees and has chaired Nomination 
and Remuneration and IT Committees. 

In  addition  to  Board  appointments,  Erica  consults  extensively  in  the  public  and  private 
sectors at CEO and Board level on a range of business issues. In an executive capacity, 
Erica held senior positions in finance, funds management and insurance at the ANZ bank 
and worked with international consultancy firms. 

Other current directorships 
Nil 

Former directorships  
Wilsons Investment Management HTM (ASX: WIG) – Member, Audit/Risk and Nomination 
and Remuneration Committees (2013-2014) 
Victorian  Funds  Management  Corporation  (2002-2009)  –  Chair,  Nomination  and 
Remuneration Committee and Member, Audit/Risk and Investment Committees 
Eastern Health (2000-2004) – Chair, IT Committee and Member, Audit/Risk Committee 
Ilhan Food Allergy Foundation (2007-2010)  

Other positions 
Founder  of  AnaphylaxiStop,  a  social  enterprise  supporting  medical  research  into  food 
allergies (appointed 2006) 
Director, Erica Lane & Associates Pty Ltd (appointed January 2004) 

Special responsibilities 
Chair – Remuneration Committee (appointed 1 July 2015) 
Member – Audit, Compliance and Risk Management Committee (current) 
Chair – Nomination and Remuneration Committee (ceased 30 June 2015) 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 10 

31

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Information on Directors and Company Secretaries (continued) 

Rhonda O’Donnell 
M App Sc, MBA (Melbourne) 
Non-Executive Director 

Experience 
Rhonda joined the Board of the Company in 2013. 

including 
Rhonda  has  extensive  experience 
telecommunications, information technology, education, government and utilities.  Rhonda 
has been a successful executive and board member in both the private and public sectors. 
Rhonda has received several industry achievements including the award for the Victorian 
Telstra Business Woman of the Year in 1999. 

international  and 

industries 

local 

in 

Other current directorships 
Non-executive director, Catapult Group International Ltd (appointed September 2014) 
Non-executive director, MTAA Superannuation Fund Pty Limited (appointed May 2015) 
Executive director, O’Donnell Global Solutions Pty Ltd (appointed August 2009) 

Former directorships  
Non-executive director, RMIT Vietnam (2011-2015) 
Non-executive director, RMIT Training (2010-2015) 
Managing Director, Cambridge Technology Partners (2000-2003) 
Managing  Director,  Global  Customer  Solutions  (GCS)  (a  subsidiary  of  TXU  (now  TRU 
Energy) (1998-2000) 

Other current positions 
Current Member, RMIT Council (appointed in September 2008) 
Strategy Consultant – DB Results (current) 

Other former positions 
Previous Chairman and President, Novell Asia Pacific (2001-2007) 
Previous Chairman, Victorian Government Purchasing Board (2005-2011) 
Previous Chairman, Advisory Board Insync (2011-2015) 

Special responsibilities 
Member – Audit, Compliance and Risk Management Committee (current) 
Member – Remuneration Committee (appointed 1 July 2015) 
Member – Nomination Committee (appointed 1 July 2015) 
Member – Nomination and Remuneration Committee (ceased 30 June 2015)  

Wayne Brown 
BCom (Hons), 
M Int Bus (Melbourne), 
CA MAICD 
Group Chief Financial 
Officer and 
Joint Company Secretary 

Experience 
Wayne  commenced  as  Chief  Financial  Officer  and  Company  Secretary  of  Slater  and 
Gordon in 2004. Prior to joining Slater and Gordon, Wayne was the Financial Controller of 
Grand Hotel Group (an ASX listed property trust) and prior to that, Wayne worked at Arthur 
Andersen  for  ten  years  where  he  specialised  in  corporate  recovery,  insolvency  and 
restructuring.  Wayne  contributes  skills  in  corporate  governance,  financial  management, 
analysis and reporting. 

Kirsten Morrison 
BA/LLB (Hons) 
Grad. Dip. Applied 
Corporate Governance 
General Counsel and Joint 
Company Secretary 

Experience 
Kirsten commenced as a commercial litigator with Slater and Gordon in 2006 and then as 
General Counsel and Company Secretary in 2008. In August 2015, Kristen has taken up 
the role as General Counsel for Slater and Gordon Group UK. Prior to joining Slater and 
Gordon, Kirsten was a lawyer at Allens Arthur Robinson and completed an Associateship 
to the Hon. Justice Hargrave in the Victorian Supreme Court.  Kirsten contributes skills in 
commercial law and corporate governance. 

32

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 11 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Directors’ Meetings 
The number of meetings of the Board of Directors and of each Board committee held during the financial year and the 
number of meetings attended by each director were: 

Board of Directors 

Audit, Compliance and Risk 
Management Committee 

Nomination and Remuneration 
Committee 

Eligible to 
attend 

Attended 

Eligible to 
attend 

Attended 

Eligible to 
attend 

Attended 

12 
12 
12 
12 
12 
12 

12 
11 
12 
12 
12 
12 

- 
6 
- 
6 
6 
6 

- 
6 
- 
6 
6 
6 

- 
4 
- 
4 
4 
4 

- 
4 
- 
4 
4 
4 

A Grech  

I Court  

K Fowlie 

E Lane 

J Skippen  

R O’Donnell 

Directors’ Interests in Shares 
Directors’ relevant interests in shares of the Company as at the date of this report are detailed below. 

Ordinary shares of the 
Company 

Performance rights  

A Grech 

I Court 

K Fowlie 

E Lane 

J Skippen 

R O’Donnell 

6,750,656 
59,804 
5,646,221 
170,000 
25,000 
25,000 

40,000 
- 
16,000 
- 
- 
- 

Directors’ Interest in Contracts 
Directors’ interests in contracts are disclosed in Note 29 to the financial statements. 

Auditor’s Independence Declaration 
A copy of the auditor’s independence declaration as required under section 307C of the Corporations Act 2001 in relation 
to the audit for the financial year is provided with this report. 

Proceedings on behalf of the Company 
No person has applied to the Court under section 237 of the  Corporations Act 2001 for leave to bring proceedings on 
behalf of the Company, or to intervene in any proceedings to which the Company is a party, for the purpose of taking 
responsibility on behalf of the Company for all or part of those proceedings. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 12 

33

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Non-audit Services 
Written  approval  for  non-audit  services  is  provided  by  resolution  of  the  Audit,  Compliance  and  Risk  Management 
Committee and approval is notified to the Board of Directors. Non-audit services provided by the auditors of the Group 
during the year are detailed below. The directors are satisfied that the provision of the non-audit services during the year 
by  the  auditor  is  compatible  with  the  general  standard  of  independence  for  auditors  imposed  by  the  Corporations  Act 
2001. 

During  the  year,  the  following  fees  were  paid  or  payable  for  non-audit  services  provided  by  the  auditor  of  the  parent 
entity, its related practices and non-related audit firms: 

Due diligence investigations 
- Pitcher Partners 
- Ernst & Young LLP 

Total remuneration for due diligence investigations 

Other Advisory 
- Pitcher Partners 
- Baker Tilly 

Total remuneration for other advisory 

Total remuneration for non-audit services 

2015  

 $           

2014 

$    

177,860 
1,475,791 

1,653,651 

39,227 
4,245 

43,472 

1,697,123 

15,900 
- 

15,900 

17,557 
- 

17,557 

33,457 

34

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 13 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report 
Dear Shareholder, 

I am pleased to present our Remuneration Report for the year ended 30 June 2015. In striving to provide for continuous 
improvement, the Remuneration Report format has been modified so as to provide a framework for clearer disclosure of 
the relevant information to shareholders. 

The  2015  financial  year  has  been  a  year  of  great  change  for  the  Slater  and  Gordon  Group.  The  strong  underlying 
business  performance  has  continued  and  in  May  2015,  we  successfully  completed  the  purchase  of  Slater  Gordon 
Solutions (“SGS”), creating a leading consumer law firm in the UK. The Board is confident that this acquisition will deliver 
significant long term value to the Company’s shareholders. Full details of the acquisition are dealt with comprehensively 
elsewhere in the Directors’ Report. 

I wish to highlight the changes in Board and executive key management personnel (“KMP”) remuneration, as follows: 

•  Chair, Non-Executive Directors (“NED”) and committee fees increased in FY15 by approximately 5%. This was the 

first increase since FY12. 

•  The Board undertook a review of all executive KMP and Board remuneration during the year, including independent 
remuneration consultant input, and will be recommending to shareholders at the upcoming AGM that the Director fee 
pool limit be increased to accommodate additional Board appointment(s) and to better reflect market expectations of 
NED fees. Despite these proposed changes our Board remuneration settings will remain conservative, ie. at the lower 
end of the range for companies of comparable size and complexity. 

•  As of 30 June 2015, all Board and executive KMP held shares in the Company. Minimum shareholding guidelines for 
Board members and executive KMP are presently under consideration and any policy changes will be announced in 
due course, as required. 

•  The Board intends to revise the remuneration opportunity for executive KMP in FY16. It is intended that increases in 
fixed  remuneration  will  be  held  to  less  than  3%  unless  there  has  been  a  material  change  in  the  responsibility 
encompassed by the relevant position.  

•  Although executive KMP remuneration will remain conservative in FY16, the Board intends to increase ‘at risk’ short 
and long term remuneration opportunities for all executive KMP. These increased remuneration opportunities will be 
conditional  upon  performance  to  ensure  appropriate  alignment  to  shareholder  interests.    Bonuses  to  be  paid  to 
executive KMP in respect of FY15 have been provisionally determined and will not exceed $570,000. All executive 
KMP scored well against their KPIs, however, the total amount awarded will be less than the total paid in FY14. This 
reflects  the  Board’s  view  that  whilst  the  performance  was  strong,  there  are  areas  where  further  improvement  is 
required.  Final  amounts  will  be  determined  following  completion  of  the  Company’s  performance  and  development 
review cycle in October 2015.  

•  Under consideration for FY16 are: the implementation of a clawback policy in relation to executive KMP; a policy of 
STI deferral for executive KMP; and minimum shareholding guidelines for the Board and executive KMP. A policy of 
STI  deferral  is  currently  in  place  with  key  leaders  outside  of  the  Group  Executive.  Any  policy  changes  will  be 
announced in due course, as required. 

•  No equity incentives for executive KMP vested in FY15 and no previously granted equity incentives will vest in FY16.  

Effective from 1 July 2015, the Nomination and Remuneration Committee has been reconfigured into two (2) separate 
committees.  The  Nomination  Committee  will  be  focused  on  Board  and  Committee  composition,  appointment  and 
induction  of  new  Board  members,  succession  planning  and  performance  evaluation  for  the  Board  as  a  whole.  The 
Remuneration Committee will continue to focus its efforts on ensuring that Board remuneration remains competitive but 
conservative and that executive KMP remuneration has an appropriate balance between fixed and variable components 
with a clear relationship between Group performance and risk management, including the successful integration of any 
acquisitions.  

For a more fulsome analysis of these matters, please see the enclosed Remuneration Report.  

Erica Lane 
Chair Remuneration Committee 
29 September 2015 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 14 

35

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

Contents 

Section  Title 

1.0 

Introduction 

2.0 

3.0 

Remuneration 
governance 

Non-executive Director 
remuneration 

4.0 

Executive remuneration 

Description 
Describes the scope of the Remuneration Report and the individual Board and 
executive  key  management  personnel  whose  remuneration  details  are 
disclosed. 

Describes  the  role  of  the  Board  and  the  Nomination  and  Remuneration 
Committee  (“NRC”),  and  the  use  of  remuneration  consultants  when  making 
Board and executive KMP remuneration decisions. 

Provides details regarding the fees paid to Non-executive Directors. 

Outlines  the  principles  applied  to  executive  KMP  remuneration  decisions  and 
the  framework  used  to  deliver  the  various  components  of  remuneration, 
including explanation of the performance and remuneration linkages.  

5.0 

6.0 

Employee share scheme 
and other share 
information 

Provides  details  regarding  the  Group’s  employee  equity  plans  including  the 
information  required  by  the  Corporations  Act  2001  and  applicable  accounting 
standards. 

Service contracts and 
employment agreements 

Provides  details  regarding  the  contractual  arrangements  between  the  Group 
and the executive KMP whose remuneration details are disclosed. 

36

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 15 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

1.0 Introduction  
The  Group  is  a  leading  international  consumer  law  firm  employing  approximately  5,350  people  across  95  locations  in 
Australia and the United Kingdom. Our mission is to provide people with easier access to world class legal services. The 
Board  has  adopted  contemporary  executive  remuneration  strategies  to  reward  executives  fairly  in  a  competitive 
environment. Policies are also flexible enough to enable the Group to attract, motivate and retain competent executives 
in a number of locations. 

The  Board’s  philosophy  and  approach  to  executive  remuneration  has  been  to  balance  fair  remuneration  for  skills  and 
expertise with a risk and reward framework that supports sustainable growth.  

The  remuneration  policies  in  respect  of  the  Group’s  executive  KMP  are  reviewed  annually.  The  most  notable 
achievement in FY15 was the acquisition of the professional services division from Quindell Plc (now rebranded as Slater 
Gordon Solutions (“SGS”)) in the UK (announced on 30 March 2015) and supporting capital raising. A comprehensive 
analysis of this transaction is covered elsewhere in the Directors’ Report. The full impact of this acquisition will be shown 
in  the  FY16  financial  statements.  In  FY15  the  Group  grew  net  profit  after  tax  (“NPAT”)  from  $68.2m  to  $83.8m  and 
revenue grew by 43% representing strong year on year performance and over achievement against our business targets 
in  revenue  terms.    The  lower  growth  in  NPAT  was  largely  as  a  result  of  changes  to  the  accounting  treatment  of 
acquisition consideration and as such did not impact on cash performance. The results of the changes in application of 
the  relevant  accounting  standards  to  acquisitions  will  normalise  over  time.  Overall,  the  Board  believes  the  Group’s 
approach to remuneration is balanced, fair and equitable, designed to reward and motivate a successful and experienced 
executive team to deliver business growth and success as well as to meet the expectations of shareholders. 

The Board’s composition has remained unchanged over the year. Given the recent SGS acquisition and increase in the 
scale and footprint of the Group, the Board has determined to recruit two additional non-executive directors over the next 
several months. 

1.1 Scope 
This  Remuneration  Report  sets  out  the  remuneration  arrangements  in  place  for  the  Board  and  executive  KMP  of  the 
Group  during  FY15,  in  accordance  with  the  relevant  provisions  of  the  Corporations  Act  2001  and  the  applicable 
accounting standard requirements. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 16 

37

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

1.2 Key Management Personnel  
KMP have authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the Group and comprise the 
NED and executive KMP (being the two (2) executive directors and other senior executives named in this report). Details 
of the KMP as at year end are set out in the table below: 

Name 

 Title  

Non-executive Directors 

John Skippen 

Ian Court 

Erica Lane 

Chair, Non-executive Director 
Member, Audit, Compliance and 
Risk Committee,  
Chair, Nomination Committee  

Chair, Audit, Compliance and Risk 
Committee, Non-executive Director 

Chair, Remuneration Committee, 
Non-executive Director 

Change in FY15 

Country of 
Residence 

Appointed Chair, Nomination Committee, 
1 July 2015  

Australia 

No change. Full year 

Australia 

Changed from Chair, Nomination and 
Remuneration Committee to Chair, 
Remuneration Committee, 1 July 2015  

Australia 

Australia 

Rhonda O’Donnell 

Non-executive Director 

No change. Full year 

Executive Directors 

Andrew Grech 

Group Managing Director 

Ken Fowlie 

Managing Director (UK and Europe) 

Other Executive KMP 

Wayne Brown 

Group Chief Financial Officer 

Neil Kinsella 

Head of General Law, UK 

Hayden Stephens 

Chief Executive Officer, General 
Law 

Cath Evans 

Chief Executive Officer, Personal 
Injury Law 

Felicity Pantelidis 

Group Chief Operating Officer 

Title changed from Managing Director to 
Group Managing Director, 1 July 2014 

Australia 

Chief Executive Officer Australia to 
Managing Director (UK and Europe), 1 
May 2015  

United 
Kingdom 

Title changed from Chief Financial Officer 
to Group Chief Financial Officer, 1 July 
2014 

Australia 

Changed from Head of UK to Head of 
M&A (UK), October 2014 to Interim Head 
of General Law UK in August 2015 

United 
Kingdom 

Changed from Head of Personal Injury 
Australia to Chief Executive Officer of 
General Law, 1 July 2015  
Changed from Chief Executive Officer 
(UK) to Chief Executive Officer, Personal 
Injury Law, 1 July 2015  
Changed from Chief Operating Officer, to 
Group Chief Operating Officer, 1 July 
2015  

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

38

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 17 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

2.0 Remuneration Governance  
This  section  of  the  Remuneration  Report  describes  the  role  of  the  Board  and  the  Nomination  and  Remuneration 
Committee  (“NRC”),  and  the  use  of  remuneration  consultants  when  making  Board  and  executive  KMP  remuneration 
decisions. 

2.1 Role of the Board and the NRC 
The Board has overall responsibility for the Group’s remuneration strategy and policy. Consistent with this responsibility, 
the Board has established the NRC, comprised solely of independent NEDs. 

The role of the NRC is set out in its Charter, which is reviewed annually and was last revised and approved by the Board 
in FY15. The NRC will be reconfigured into two (2) separate committees effective from 1 July 2015. 

During the reporting year, the NRC’s role included: 

•  ensuring that appropriate procedures exist to assess the remuneration levels of the Chairman, other NEDs, executive 

directors, direct reports to the Group Managing Director, Board committees and the Board as a whole; 

•  ensuring that the Group meets the requirements of the ASX Corporate Governance Council’s Guidelines, including 

gender diversity principles and recommendations; 

•  ensuring that the Group adopts, monitors and applies appropriate remuneration policies and procedures; 

•  ensuring  that  reporting  disclosures  related  to  remuneration  meet  the  Board’s  disclosure  objectives  and  all  relevant 

legal requirements; 

•  developing,  maintaining  and  monitoring  appropriate  talent  management  programs  including  succession  planning, 

recruitment, development; and retention and termination policies and procedures for senior management; and 

•  developing, maintaining and monitoring appropriate post-employment and other benefit arrangements for the Group. 

The NRC’s role and interaction with Board, internal and external advisors for FY15, is illustrated below: 

The Board 

Reviews, applies 
judgement and, as 
appropriate, 
approves the NRC’s 
recommendations. 

The Nomination 
and 
Remuneration 
Committee 

The NRC operates under 
the delegated authority of 
the Board. 
The NRC is empowered 
to source any internal 
resources and obtain 
external independent 
professional advice it 
considers necessary to 
enable it to make 
recommendations to the 
Board: 

External consultants 

Remuneration policy, composition and 
quantum of remuneration components for 
executive KMP, and performance targets 

Remuneration policy in respect of NEDs 

Internal resources 

Talent management policies and practices 
including post-employment benefits 

Design features of employee and 
executive STI and LTI plan awards, 
including setting of performance and other 
vesting criteria 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 18 

39

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

2.1 Role of the Board and the NRC (continued) 
Further information on the NRC’s role, responsibilities and membership will be contained in the Corporate Governance 
Statement in the Company’s Annual Report. The NRC terms of reference can also be viewed in the Governance section 
of the Company’s website, www.slatergordon.com.au. 

2.2 Use of Remuneration Consultants  
During  FY15,  remuneration  consultancy  contracts  were  entered  into  by  the  Company  and  accordingly  the  disclosures 
required under section 300A(1)(h) of the Corporations Act 2001 are set out as follows: 

Advisor/consultant – FY15 
Ian Crichton, Independent Remuneration 
Consultant, Crichton & Associates Pty Limited 

Services provided 
1.  Benchmark Remuneration 

Assessment and Report in respect 
of the Board and executive KMP 

2.  Drafting and review of FY15 
Remuneration Report 

3.  Review of FY15 equity allocations 

Remuneration consultant 
for the purpose of the 
Corporations Act 
Yes 

the 

Key questions regarding use of remuneration consultants 
Did 
remuneration  consultant  provide 
remuneration  recommendations  in  relation  to 
any of the KMP for FY15? 

Yes. Recommendations were in a written report to the Board. 

How  much  was  the  remuneration  consultant 
paid  by  the  Company  for  remuneration  related 
and other services? 

Remuneration Services - $28,965 
Other Services - $32,352 

What  arrangements  did  the  Company  make  to 
ensure  that  the  making  of  the  remuneration 
recommendations  would  be  free  from  undue 
influence by the executive KMP? 

The  Company  adopted  a  protocol  for procuring  advice  relating  to 
KMP remuneration. The protocol requires that the Board provides 
written  instructions  to  the  consultant  with  a  specified  scope  of 
works  and  requiring  that  the  consultant  report  all  findings  to  the 
Board in writing free of any interference from executive KMP. 

Is  the  Board  satisfied  that  the  remuneration 
information  provided  was  free  from  any  such 
undue  influence? What  are  the  reasons  for  the 
Board being so satisfied? 

Yes, the Board is satisfied. The reasons are as follows: the Chair 
of  the  Company  and  the  NRC  had  oversight  of  all  requests  for 
remuneration  information  and  the  protocol  with  respect  to  the 
procurement of remuneration related advice was appropriate.  

40

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 19 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

3.0 Non-executive Director Remuneration 

3.1 NED Remuneration  
Principle 
Fees are set by reference 
to key considerations 

Comment 
Fees  for  NEDs  are  based  on  the  nature  of  the  NEDs’  work,  their  responsibilities  and 
anticipated time commitment. The remuneration paid is intended to reflect the complexity of 
the business and its geographic spread. In determining the level of fees, independent survey 
data on comparable companies (ASX listed companies of similar size) is considered. NEDs’ 
fees are recommended by the NRC and determined by the Board. Shareholders approve the 
aggregate amount available for the remuneration of NEDs.  

Remuneration is structured 
to preserve independence 
whilst creating alignment  

To  preserve  independence  and  impartiality,  NEDs  are  not  entitled  to  any  form  of  incentive 
payments including options and the level of their fees is not set with reference to measures of 
the Group’s performance. 

(see also section 3.4) 

The  Company  currently  does  not  have  any  minimum  shareholding  guidelines  for  NEDs. 
However,  all  NEDs  acquired  shares  in  the  Company  during  FY15  and  all  have  current 
holdings. 

Aggregate Board and 
committee fees are 
approved by shareholders 

The  total  amount  of  fees  paid  to  NEDs  in  FY15  was  $471,873  in  total  which  is  73%  of  the 
aggregate annual amount approved by shareholders at the 2012 AGM.  

3.2 NED Fees and Other Benefits  
Elements 

Details 

Board/Committee 

Board Chair fee¹ 

Fees per annum – FY15 

Board NED base fee¹ 

$158,055 

$89,565 

Committee fees 

Committee Chair  Committee  Member 

Audit, Compliance and Risk Management 

Nomination and Remuneration 
Committee 

$10,000 

$10,000 

$5,000 

$5,000 

¹ Chair and NED fees were increased by CPI during FY15. Committee fees are not paid to the Chair of the Board. The amounts referred 
to in this table reflect fees determined by the Board in respect of FY15 only. 

Post-employment benefits 
Superannuation 

Superannuation contributions have been made in accordance with the Company’s 
statutory obligations.  

Other benefits 
Equity instruments 

Other fees/benefits 

NEDs do not receive any performance related remuneration, options or performance 
rights.  

NEDs receive reimbursement for costs directly related to Slater and Gordon business. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 20 

41

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

3.3 NED Total Remuneration – Actual Paid 

Amounts $ 

John Skippen (Chair) 

Ian Court 

Erica Lane 

Rhonda O’Donnell 

Total 

Short-term benefits  Post-employment benefits 

Year 
FY15 
FY14 
FY15 
FY14 
FY15 
FY14 
FY15 
FY14 
FY15 
FY14 

Fees 
137,835 
137,324 
79,258 
72,442 
97,516 
91,549 
88,384 
82,465 
402,993 
383,780 

Superannuation benefits 
24,131 
12,702 
27,099 
23,976 
9,259 
8,468 
8,391 
7,628 
68,880 
52,774 

Total* 
161,966 
150,026 
106,357 
96,418 
106,775 
100,017 
96,775 
90,093 
471,873 
436,554 

* NED base fees were increased by CPI during FY15.  The FY15 remuneration includes back pay of the FY14 CPI increase on NED 
fees. 

The aggregate annual amount available for payment to NEDs was last approved by shareholders at the 2012 AGM in the amount of 
$650,000. 

3.4 Minimum Shareholding Guidelines 
Although all NEDs hold shares in the Company, at the end of FY15 there were no minimum shareholding guidelines in 
place that apply to NEDs. The implementation of minimum shareholding guidelines for NEDs will be considered during 
FY16.  

42

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 21 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.0 Executive Remuneration 

4.1 Executive KMP Remuneration  
The  Group’s  executive  remuneration  policies  are  intended  to  fairly  remunerate  executives  for  their  contribution  to  the 
Group.  They  are  also  designed  to  attract,  motivate  and  retain  qualified  and  experienced  executives  employed  across 
diverse  businesses  and  geographic  locations.  Fixed  remuneration  components  are  determined  having  regard  to  the 
specific skills and competencies of the executive KMP with reference to both internal and external relativities, including 
local market conditions. The ‘at risk’ components of remuneration consisting of both short and long term incentives are 
intended to reward (risk balanced) performance on the achievement of clearly defined targets. 

Executive KMP remuneration objectives can be illustrated as follows: 

Attract, motivate and 
retain competent 
executives across 
diverse businesses 
and geographies

An appropriate 
balance of ‘fixed’ and 
‘at risk’ components

Executive KMP 
remuneration 
objectives

Create reward 
differentiation to drive 
performance, values 
and behaviors

Shareholder value 
creation through 
equity components 
linked to performance

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 22 

43

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.1 Executive KMP Remuneration (continued) 

Remuneration 
will be 
delivered as: 

Strategic 
intent and 
market 
positioning 

d
e
x
F

i

Total fixed remuneration 
(“TFR”) 
TFR is set based on job 
role, market relativities, 
reflecting responsibilities, 
performance, 
qualifications, experience 
and geographic location 

Base salary plus any fixed 
elements related to local 
markets, including 
superannuation or 
equivalents 

TFR will generally be 
positioned at the 
median compared to 
relevant market based 
data considering 
expertise and 
performance in the role 

Total target 
remuneration 
(TTR) is set by 
reference to the 
relevant 
geographic 
market. 

TTR is intended 
to be positioned 
in the third 
quartile 
compared to 
relevant market 
benchmark 
comparisons. 
Higher quartile 
TTR will only 
result if 
outperformance 
is achieved.  

k
s
i
r

t

A

Short-term incentives 
(“STI”) 
STI performance criteria 
are set by reference to a 
Balanced Scorecard 
methodology, with KPI 
including financial and 
operational, people and 
culture and clients and 
development 

Executive KMP receive 
the short term incentive in 
cash (after tax) at the end 
of the performance 
period. No STI deferral 
applies to executive KMP 

Performance incentive 
is directed to achieving 
Board approved 
targets, reflective of 
changing 
circumstances. Ideally, 
TFR + STI is intended 
to be positioned in the 
third quartile of the 
relevant benchmark 
comparisons 

Long-term incentives 
(“LTI”) 
LTI targets are linked to 
both the Group’s internal 
EPS growth and external 
relative TSR 
outperformance measures 

In FY15, equity was 
offered as performance 
rights, subject to 
performance and service 
for three years from grant 
date. The equity is at risk 
until vesting. Performance 
is tested once at the 
vesting date 

LTI is intended to 
reward executive KMP 
for sustainable long-
term performance 
aligned to 
shareholders’ interests. 
LTI allocation values 
are conservatively 
positioned 

44

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 23 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.2 Remuneration Composition Mix and Timing of Receipt 

4.2.1 Current Remuneration Mix  
The Group endeavours to provide an appropriate and competitive mix of remuneration components balanced between 
fixed and at risk and paid in both cash and deferred equity. The broad remuneration composition mix for executive KMP 
can be illustrated as follows: 

Remuneration Mix for FY15 

The remuneration mix for FY15 is illustrated below: 

Position 

TFR as a % of TTR 

STI (at target) as a 
% of TTR 

LTI (at target) as a 
% of TTR 

Group Managing Director 

70% 

22% 

8% 

Other Executive KMP 

64% to 76% 

21% to 33% 

3% to 5% 

Remuneration Mix for FY16  

A detailed review of executive KMP remuneration was undertaken during FY15. All executive KMP were found to be very 
conservatively positioned relative to comparable executives in comparable companies. The Board has determined that 
the remuneration opportunity for all executive KMP should be increased, however, this increase will be mostly in ‘at risk’ 
performance-based remuneration, except where the individual role and responsibilities have fundamentally changed.  

The  individual  remuneration  opportunity  for  executive  KMP  for  FY16  has  been  provisionally  determined  and  will  be 
finalised by the Board in October 2015. The proposed remuneration mix for FY16 is as follows:  

Position 

Executive KMP 

TFR as a % of TTR 

STI (at target) as a 
% of TTR 

LTI (at target) as a 
% of TTR 

48% to 60% 

16% to 24% 

20% to 33% 

The  Board  intends  to  focus  executive  KMP  remuneration  opportunity  on  the  achievement  of  both  short  and  long  term 
performance to ensure the best alignment between executive remuneration outcomes and shareholder interests. 

Total Fixed Remuneration (“TFR”) 

The Group’s approach to TFR settings is to aim to position all executives at about the median of comparable positions as 
conservatively as possible to control fixed costs, exchange rate movements notwithstanding. Only modest increases in 
TFR  were  approved  in  FY15  to  maintain  this  conservative  approach.  TFR  settings  in  FY16  have  been  adjusted  to 
account for changes in job roles, accountability or additional responsibilities. 

Short-Term Incentives (“STI”) 

The Group have focused STI on achieving selected KPI adopting a modified Balanced Scorecard methodology, but with 
a minimum financial performance as a primary gateway. To support the balanced approach to TFR, the Group has set 
STI opportunity aimed at achieving a market competitive TFR + STI above the median which is only paid if performance 
is delivered.   

Long-Term Incentives (“LTI”)   

The LTI opportunity is determined based on the dollar value of the number of rights (or other selected equity interest) to 
be  granted  to  each  individual  executive  KMP  and  based  on  the  gross  contract  value.  That  is,  before  applying  any 
discount. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 24 

45

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.2.1 Current Remuneration Mix (continued) 
Total target remuneration (“TTR”) 

TTR  under  the  remuneration  mix  adopted  will,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Board,  deliver  an  overall  risk  adjusted  reward 
opportunity which is fair and market competitive and aligned to Group and Business Unit performance. 

Shareholders should note that the Group has performance hurdles that are demanding, particularly for LTI. Further, any 
LTI award will only have value to the executive if the performance hurdles are met to enable vesting to occur.  

4.2.2 Remuneration – Timing of Receipt of Remuneration 
The  three  complementary  components  of  executive  KMP  remuneration  are  ‘earned’  over  multiple  time  ranges.  This  is 
illustrated in the following chart:  

Note: The LTI component is awarded at the beginning of Year 1 and earned at the end of Year 3, but expensed over the 
three year service period. 

As  illustrated,  executive  KMP  remuneration  is  delivered  on  a  cascading  basis.  This  remuneration  mix  is  designed  to 
ensure  executive  KMP  are  focused  on  delivering  results  over  both  the  short  term  and  the  long  term  if  they  are  to 
maximise  their  remuneration  opportunity.  The  Board  believes  this  approach  aligns  executive  KMP  remuneration  to 
shareholder interests and market expectations. 

4.3 Total Fixed Remuneration Explained 
Total fixed remuneration (“TFR”) includes all remuneration and benefits paid to an executive KMP calculated on a total 
employment cost basis. In addition to base salary, selected overseas executives receive benefits that may include health 
insurance, car allowances and relocation allowances. In Australia, retirement benefits are generally paid in line with the 
prevailing  Statutory  Superannuation  Guarantee.  Elsewhere,  retirement  benefits  are  generally  paid  in  line  with  local 
legislation and practice. 

46

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 25 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.3 Total Fixed Remuneration Explained (continued) 
Executive KMP TFR is tested regularly for market competiveness by reference to appropriate independent and externally 
sourced comparable benchmark information. This includes comparable ASX listed companies based on a range of size 
criteria  including  market  capitalisation,  as  well  as  taking  into  account  an  executive’s  responsibilities,  performance, 
qualifications, experience and geographic location. 

TFR adjustments, if any, are made with reference to individual performance, an increase in job role or responsibility and 
changing market circumstances; as reflected through independent benchmark assessments or promotion. 

Any adjustments to executive KMP remuneration are approved by the Board, based on Remuneration Committee and 
Group Managing Director input and recommendations. 

4.4 Variable (at Risk) Remuneration Explained 
The purpose of variable remuneration is to direct executives’ behaviours towards maximising the Group’s short, medium 
and long-term performance. The key aspects of each component are summarised below: 

4.4.1 Short-Term Incentives (“STI”) 
Purpose 

The  STI  arrangements  are  designed  to  reward  executives  for  achieving  the  Group’s  strategic 
and  operational  objectives  under  a  Balanced  Scorecard methodology  with  annual  performance 
targets  set  by  the  Board  at  the  beginning  of  the  performance  period.  The  STI  program  is 
reviewed annually by the Remuneration Committee and approved by the Board.  

All STI awarded to the Group Managing Director and other executive KMP are approved by the 
Remuneration Committee and Board. 

Performance 
targets 

The key performance criteria of the Group’s FY15 STI were as follows:   

Financial  and  Operational  performance  (not 
than  55%  of  weighting).  Financial 
performance for KMP is based on Group financial performance (Group EBITDA, EBITDA margin, 
Group  cash flow).  Operational  performance is based  on  the  delivery  of  key  elements  of Group 
strategy; 

less 

People  and  Culture  (not  less  than  35%  of  weighting).  These  objectives  typically  relate  to 
organisational planning and development for the Group; and 

Client  and  Development.  These objectives  typically  relate  to  business improvement  initiatives 
within the Group. 

The  mix  of  performance  criteria  and  the  individual  key  performance  indicators  may  vary  from 
year to year depending on the assessed annual performance priorities at the start of the year. An 
overall financial performance gate is applied to all executive KMP awards. 

Any anomalies or discretionary elements are validated and approved by the Board.  

Rewarding 
performance 

The  achievement  against  the  performance  criteria  set  is  calculated  under  a  predetermined 
matrix. 

Validation  of  performance  against  the  measures  set  for  the  Group  Managing  Director  is 
endorsed  by  the  Group  Chief  Financial  Officer,  and  then  reviewed  and  approved  by  the 
Remuneration Committee and the Board.  

Validation of performance against the measures set for the executive KMP are endorsed by the 
Group  Managing  Director,  and  then  reviewed  and  approved  by  the  Remuneration  Committee 
and the Board. 

Any anomalies or discretionary elements are validated and approved by the Board. 

Deferral of a 
portion of STI  

Mandatory deferral of STI only applies to selected key leader executives who do not participate 
in the LTI. There is no mandatory STI deferral policy in place for executive KMP, however, this 
policy is under review in FY16. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 26 

47

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.4.1 Short-Term Incentives (“STI”) (continued) 

Actual STI awarded compared to STI opportunity 

Executive KMP 
Andrew Grech 

Ken Fowlie 

Wayne Brown 

Position 

Group Managing Director 

Managing Director (UK and Europe) 

Group Chief Financial Officer 

Neil Kinsella 
Hayden Stephens  Chief Executive Officer, General Law 

Head of General Law, UK 

Cath Evans 

Chief Executive Officer, Personal Injury 
Law 

Felicity Pantelidis  Group Chief Operating Officer 
*Non-discretionary element as an overseas living allowance 

Target STI 
as a % of 
FY15 TTR 

STI 
awarded as 
a % of 
Target STI 

STI 
forfeited in 
FY15 as a 
% of Target 
STI 

Anticipated 
STI to be 
awarded in 
FY15 ($) 

21.83% 

24.01% 

23.87% 

22.21% 

25.10% 

32.90% 

20.62% 

20.00% 

20.00% 

20.00% 

28.27% 

20.00% 

44.44%* 

80.00% 

80.00% 

80.00% 

80.00% 

71.73% 

80.00% 

55.56% 

20.00% 

 35,000  

 30,000  

 25,000  

 40,000  

 30,000  

 100,000  

 80,000  

The amount of STI awarded has been provisionally determined based on the Company’s assessment of results achieved 
by executive KMP against robust performance criteria set out in individual Balanced Scorecards. Ratings are based on 
meeting  or  exceeding  expectations  across  all  areas  of  responsibility.  Recommendations  are  subject  to  rigorous 
moderation by the Remuneration Committee and the Board. The moderation process for STI to be awarded to executive 
KMP in respect of FY15 will be finalised by the Board in the first half of FY16.   

The KMP substantially met their performance criteria across the balance of their performance targets given the stretching 
nature of the Financial and Operational objectives. 

As  previously  noted,  the  Company  takes  a  balanced  but  conservative  approach  to  payment  of  STI  to  drive 
outperformance.  

4.4.2 Long-Term Incentives (“LTI”) 
The  LTI  provides  an  annual  opportunity  for  executive  KMP  and  other  selected  executives  (based  on  their  ability  to 
influence  and  execute  strategy)  to  receive  an  equity  award,  that  is  intended  to  align  a  portion  of  executives’  overall 
remuneration to shareholder value over the longer term. All LTI awards are deferred for three years and remain at risk 
and subject to forfeiture or lapse until vesting. Company performance must meet or exceed earnings (EPS) growth rates 
and/or relative TSR performance hurdles over the vesting period. 

Purpose 

Types of 
equity 
awarded 

To  align  executive  KMP  remuneration  opportunity  with  shareholder  value  and  provide  retention 
stimulus. 

LTI up to FY13 was provided under the Employee Ownership Plan (“EOP”). See section 5.1 for further 
details. 

The Executive Equity Incentive Scheme (“EIP”) was introduced in November 2014. See section 5.1 for 
further details. 

Under  the  EIP,  selected  senior  executives  are  currently  offered  performance  rights  (being  a  nil 
exercise price right to fully paid ordinary shares of Slater and Gordon Limited). 

Time of 
grant 

All equity grants will be made after the AGM each year, but based on values determined prior to the 
AGM. 

Time 
restrictions 

The FY15 equity grants awarded to the Group Managing Director and other executive KMP are tested 
against the performance hurdles set, at the end of three financial years. If the performance hurdles are 
not met at the vesting date the performance rights lapse.  

48

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 27 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.4.2 Long-term Incentives (“LTI”) (continued) 
Performance 
hurdles and 
vesting 
schedule 

The FY15 equity grants to the Group Managing Director and other executive KMP are in two equal 
tranches  assigned  50%  to  compound  annual  growth  rate  (“CAGR”)  in  EPS  and  50%  subject  to 
ranking  of  TSR  against  the  S&P/ASX  300  (excluding  resources).  The  performance  conditions 
applying to the latest grant (FY15) were as follows: 

Executive Directors Only 
Compound annual growth in EPS (3 years) 
Performance¹ 

% of equity to vest 

All other Executive KMP 
Compound annual growth in EPS (3 years) 
% of equity to vest 
Performance 

< 10% 

0% 

< 7% 

0% 

10% to 15% 

50% to 100% pro-rata 

7% to 10% 

50% to 100% pro-rata 

> 15% 

100% 

> 10% 

100% 

¹  FY14  Basic  EPS  is  the  base.  The  Board  imposed  higher  performance  expectations  on  the  two  (2)  executive 
Directors. A slightly lower hurdle was determined for other executive KMP to, in part, acknowledge the relatively 
small dollar value of the opportunity in this initial grant. In future, hurdles for all executive KMP will be the same. 

Ranking of SGH TSR against S&P/ASX 300 (excluding resources) (3 years) 
Performance 

% of equity to vest 

< 50th percentile 

0% 

50th to 75th percentile 

50% to 100% pro-rata 

> 75th percentile 

100% 

Performance rights vest if the time restrictions and relevant performance hurdles are met. The Board 
must  approve  any  special  provisions,  in  accordance  with  Company  policies,  in  the  event  of 
termination  of  employment  or  a  change  of  control.  After  the  three  year  vesting  schedule,  any 
unvested performance rights lapse. 

Dividends 

No dividends are attached to performance rights.  

Voting rights 

There are no voting rights attached to performance rights (prior to vesting). 

Retesting 

There is no retesting of performance hurdles under LTI. 

LTI allocation  

In  FY15,  LTI  grants  were  based  on  a  fixed  number  of  performance  rights.  For  FY16,  the  size  of 
individual  LTI  grants  for  the  Group  Managing  Director  and  other  executive  KMP  is  determined  in 
accordance with the Board approved remuneration strategy mix. See section 4.2 for further details. 

The  target  LTI  dollar  value  for  each  executive  is  converted  to  performance  rights  according  to  LTI 
allocation values independently determined based on the gross contract value of the relevant equity 
instrument  and  based  on  a  Black-Scholes-Merton  pricing  model  without  discounting  for  service  or 
EPS and TSR performance hurdles: 

Performance  right  allocation  =  LTI  dollar  value/Black-Scholes-Merton  value  before  service  or  EPS 
and TSR performance discounts. 

The first allocation of Performance Rights under the LTI was made in FY15 and testing of the vesting conditions will not 
apply until September 2017. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 28 

49

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.5 Other Remuneration Elements and Disclosures relevant to Executive KMP 

4.5.1 Clawback 
The Group has not implemented a clawback policy to date. This position is under review in FY16. 

4.5.2 Hedging and Margin Lending Prohibition 
Directors  and  executive  KMP  must  not  engage  in  dealings  based  on  short  term  fluctuations  in  Slater  and  Gordon 
securities. If a Director or executive KMP acquires Slater and Gordon securities, they should not sell or agree to sell any 
Slater and Gordon securities of that class for at least 30 days. 

Directors are prohibited from entering into margin loans under the Group’s Share Trading Policy. Other executive KMP 
require  prior  approval  to  enter  into  a  margin  loan  arrangements  where  the  amount  of  shares  mortgaged,  provided  as 
security, lent or charged to a financier amounts to 1% or more of the issued capital in Slater and Gordon at the relevant 
time. KMP must notify the Company Secretary immediately if they are given notice by their financier of an intention to 
make a margin call and sell Slater and Gordon securities during a prohibited trading period.  

Directors and executive KMP must not enter into hedging arrangements in relation to Slater and Gordon securities that 
are unvested or subject to disposal restrictions or minimum shareholding requirements. 

In  limited  circumstances,  the  Board  may,  in  its  discretion,  allow  holders  of  securities  issued  under  the  Employee 
Ownership Plan who have a loan repayment obligation to the company to enter into a hedging arrangement with prior 
approval. 

Equity granted under the Executive Equity Incentive Scheme remains at risk until vested and exercised. It is a specific 
condition  of  grant  that  no  schemes  are  entered  into,  by  an  individual  or  their  associates  that  specifically  protect  the 
unvested value of performance rights allocated. 

The Group, in line with good corporate governance, has a Share Trading Policy setting down how and when employees 
may deal in Slater and Gordon securities. 

The  Group’s  Share  Trading  Policy  is  available  on  the  Slater  and  Gordon  website  www.slatergordon.com.au  under  the 
Firm, Governance.  

4.5.3 Cessation of Employment Provisions 
The provisions that apply for STI and LTI awards in the case of cessation of employment are detailed in section 6.0. 

4.5.4 Conditions of LTI Grants 
The conditions under which LTI performance rights are granted, and are approved by the Board in accordance with the 
relevant scheme rules, are as summarised in section 5.0. 

4.5.5 Minimum Shareholding Guidelines 
The majority of executive KMP are subject to minimum shareholding requirements under either: 

a) 
b) 
c) 

the agreement between the seven shareholders of the Company prior to listing in 2007; 
the Employee Ownership Plan; or  
agreements relating to business acquisitions by the Company since 2007.  

KMPs subject to these agreements are required to maintain a minimum number of shares that is equivalent to the lesser 
of 20% of the value or 15% of the number of shares issued to them, while they remain a member or employee of the 
Group. 

50

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 29 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.6  Relationship  between 
Remuneration 

the  Group’s  Performance  and  Executive  KMP 

4.6.1 The Group’s Financial Performance (FY11 to FY15) 

2011 

2012 

2013 

Restated
2014 

2015 

5 year 
CAGR1  

Company Performance 

Revenue ($'000) 

Profit before tax ($'000) 

Profit after tax ($'000) 

182,309  

217,704  

297,963  

   438,228  

627,309  

38.13% 

41,543  

36,494  

61,341  

95,747  

114,531  

31.75% 

27,908  

24,992  

41,521  

 68,236  

83,803  

33.45% 

Basic earnings per share (cents) 

19.10  

16.20  

23.90  

      33.80  

35.60  

14.74% 

Diluted earnings per share (cents) 

Dividends per share - paid during financial 
year (cents) 
Total dividends paid during financial year 
($'000) 

18.30  

15.70  

23.30  

5.20  

5.80  

6.30  

33.20  

6.85  

35.30  

16.15% 

8.50  

10.12% 

7,697  

8,786  

10,647  

13,770  

17,620  

24.98% 

2.78  
1 Compound Annual Growth Rate (“CAGR”) based on cumulative results 2011-2015 inclusive.  

1.85  

2.30  

Share price at 30 June ($) 

5.16  

3.56  

18.40% 

Slater and Gordon has achieved stellar compound growth on every relevant metric over the last 5 years. Executive KMP 
remuneration has materially lagged these achievements because of the Group’s conservative remuneration settings. 

The  proposed  changes  to  executive  KMP  ‘at  risk’  remuneration  is  intended  to  ensure  executives  are  only  rewarded  if 
overall short, medium and long-term Company performance is achieved. 

An  explanation  of  recent  changes  to  the  Company’s  accounting  policies  is  provided  in  Note  1(w)  to  the  financial 
statements.    For  further  explanation  of  details  on  the  Group’s  performance,  see  the  Principal  Activities,  Review  of 
Operations and Results sections of the Directors’ Report. Refer to section 4.6.3 in relation to impact on KMP LTI FY15 
base setting. 

4.6.2  Group  Current  Year  Performance  and  relationship  to  Executive  KMP 
Remuneration  
The  total  of  executive  KMP  remuneration  for  those  executives  that  remained  employed  for  the  full  year  was  lower  in 
FY15 than in FY14. This reflects the low STI payout in FY15. The accrual of LTI Awards in 2015 was small and no LTI 
award will vest earlier than 2017 and then only if the EPS and TSR hurdles are met.  

4.6.3 Group EPS and TSR Performance (FY11 to FY15) and relationship to Executive 
KMP Remuneration 
As explained in section 4.1, the Group’s remuneration framework aims to incentivise executive KMP towards long-term 
sustainable growth and the creation of shareholder value in the short, medium and long term. This is developed in two 
ways: 

•  cash STI, which is linked to achievement of performance objectives, including financial measures for the completed 

performance year (as explained in section 4.4.1); and 

•  LTI, in the form of performance rights, are linked to compound annual growth in EPS and relative TSR performance 

(as explained in section 4.4.2). 

EPS  (internal)  and  relative  TSR  (external)  are  generally  accepted  proxies  for  creation  of  shareholder  value.  It  is  the 
Board’s intention to review the suitability of these performance criteria and settings on a regular basis to ensure they best 
serve shareholders’ interests. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 30 

51

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
  
           
          
          
     
              
            
            
     
              
            
            
       
                
              
               
         
                
              
               
        
         
                   
                 
                 
                  
            
                
              
            
             
       
                   
                 
                 
                  
            
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.6.3  Group  EPS  and  TSR  Performance  and  relationship  to  Executive  KMP 
Remuneration (continued) 
Earnings per share (“EPS”) 

The  Group’s  basic  EPS targets  to  achieve  full  vesting  of  the  2015  LTI  performance  rights  grant is shown  in  the  graph 
below: 

SGH Earnings Per Share (EPS) 
Actual and Targets

60

50

40

30

20

10

0

2015

2016

2017

EPS Actual

EPS Target: Other KMP (10% p.a.)

EPS Target: Directors (15% p.a.)

50%  of  the  LTI  performance  rights  issued  to  executive  KMP  in  FY15  are  subject  to  the  Group  achieving  various 
compound  annual  growth  rates  in  EPS,  as  set  out  Section  4.4.2.  These  growth  rates  are  assessed  against  the  FY14 
reported basic EPS of 30.3 cents (“Base Year EPS”). 

Due to recent changes in the Company’s accounting policies (see Note 1(w) to the financial statements), FY14 earnings 
have been restated.  As a consequence of the restatement, the basic EPS for FY14 has increased from 30.3 cents to 
33.8 cents.   

So as to ensure that executive KMP do not receive an unintended benefit from the change to the Company’s accounting 
policies,  the  Company  intends  to  amend  the  Base  Year  EPS  to  reflect  the  revised  basic  EPS  of  33.8  cents,  thereby 
increasing  the  EPS  hurdle  requirements  of  the  FY15  LTI  performance  rights  award.  The  Board  believes  that  this 
approach is both fair and equitable to the executive KMP and will ensure shareholders are not disadvantaged as a result.  

Notwithstanding  the  proposed  increase  in  the  Base  Year  EPS,  the  amended  EPS  targets  are  still  budgeted  to  be 
achieved. 

For  more  details  on  the  Company’s  performance,  refer  the  Principal  Activities,  Review  of  Operations  and  Results 
sections of the Directors’ Report.  

Total Shareholder Return (“TSR”)  

The Group’s relative TSR performance over the relevant performance periods up to 30 June 2015 in respect of vested 
equity grants is set out below. This information is unaudited. 

52

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 31 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.6.3 Group EPS and TSR Performance (FY11 to FY15) and relationship to Executive 
KMP Remuneration (continued) 

SGH TSR vs S&P/ASX 300 (excluding Resources) Accumulation 
Index 
1 September 2014 to 25 September 2015 

140

130

120

110

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

XKOAI less Resources

SGH TSR

TSR  is  a  function  of  share  price  growth  and  dividends  reinvested.  However,  the  Group’s  performance  over  time  is 
affected by a range of variables, including currency volatility, global economic and geopolitical conditions, market growth 
for its products and other competitive pressures. 

Based on the SGH TSR performance since the date of grant of the FY15 LTI it is unlikely that performance hurdles set 
will be met, unless there is a material rerating of SGH securities between the date of this report and the vesting date. The 
Board remains optimistic that this will be the case. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 32 

53

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.7 Executive Remuneration Table – Statutory Disclosure  

Amounts $ 

Short-term 

Post-Employment 

Name 

Andrew Grech 

Ken Fowlie 

Wayne Brown 

Neil Kinsella 

Hayden 
Stephens 

Cath Evans 

Felicity 
Pantelidis 

Total 
Total 

Year 

FY15 

FY14 

FY15 

FY14 

FY15 

FY14 

FY15 

FY14 

FY15 

FY14 

FY15 

FY14 

FY15 

FY14 
FY15 
FY14 

Non-
monetary 
benefits 

Superannuation 
benefits 

Long 
service 
leave 

Salary 

Other 

542,937 

10,163  

38,684 

15,325 

502,586 

9,574  

22,744 

38,606 

428,052 

659  

27,688 

2,361 

431,772 

-   

24,359 

13,396 

- 

-  

- 

-  

351,187 

29,808  

18,783 

9,280 

20,783 

337,494 

20,526  

17,775 

18,554 

40,666 

471,625 

442,850 

-   

-   

- 

- 

- 

- 

381,260 

17,240  

18,783 

11,486 

348,016 

13,867  

382,681 

401,402 

-   

-   

17,775 

18,783 

6,936 

6,501 

25,351 

8,141 

200,000 

327,054 

10,163  

18,783 

10,001 

- 

- 
2,884,796 
2,464,120 

-   

68,033 
43,967 

- 
141,504 
108,004 

- 
54,954 
85,633 

- 
20,783 
240,666 

- 

-  

- 

-  

- 

54

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 33 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
  
 
              
  
                
                   
  
                       
              
  
              
                       
  
                       
              
  
              
                       
  
                       
              
  
                       
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.7 Executive Remuneration Table – Statutory Disclosure (continued) 

Total 

Short-term 

Long-term 

Total 

Total 

607,109 

573,510 

458,760 

469,527 

429,841 

435,015 

471,625 

442,850 

428,769 

386,594 

407,965 

634,894 

366,001 

- 

3,170,070 

2,942,390 

Bonus 

35,000 

125,000 

30,000 

50,000 

25,000 

60,000 

40,000 

88,570 

30,000 

50,000 

100,000 

225,000 

80,000 

- 

340,000 

598,570 

Value of 
options 

Value of 
performance 
shares/rights 

- 

- 

- 

- 

3,965 

11,745 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

14,451 

- 

5,780 

- 

5,549 

- 

4,814 

- 

5,549 

- 

4,814 

- 

4,162 

- 

3,965 

11,745 

45,119 

- 

49,451 

125,000 

35,780 

50,000 

34,514 

71,745 

44,814 

88,570 

35,549 

50,000 

104,814 

225,000 

84,162 

- 

389,084 

610,315 

656,560 

698,510 

494,540 

519,527 

464,355 

506,760 

516,439 

531,420 

464,318 

436,594 

512,779 

859,894 

450,163 

- 

3,559,154 

3,552,705 

Proportion of total 
remuneration 

Performance 
related 

Delivered 
as equity 

7.5% 

17.9% 

7.2% 

9.6% 

7.4% 

14.2% 

8.7% 

16.7% 

7.7% 

11.5% 

20.4% 

26.2% 

18.7% 

- 

10.9% 

17.2% 

2.2% 

0.0% 

1.2% 

0.0% 

2.0% 

2.3% 

0.9% 

0.0% 

1.2% 

0.0% 

0.9% 

0.0% 

0.9% 

- 

1.4% 

0.3% 

There  have  been  no  material  increases  in  fixed  remuneration  or  ‘at  risk’  variable  remuneration  opportunity  during  the 
year under review. Cath Evans received an overseas living allowance in FY14 and FY15. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 34 

55

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.8 Executive Remuneration Table  
This table represents the value to the executives of cash paid and vested equity awards (intrinsic value) received during 
the year and unvested equity awards (AASB-2 value) granted during the financial year, at risk. The LTI equity granted is 
a value determined under AASB-2 discounted for vesting probabilities of performance criteria which may or may not vest 
depending  on  future  outcomes  that  are  uncertain.  Accordingly,  this  table  incorporates  data  that  represents  the 
accumulation of outcomes arising from multiple years.  

Fixed 
Remuneration 
591,784 

Incentives 
35,000  

Total 
Cash 
626,784 

Past at risk 
remuneration 
received 
during the 
year 
- 

Actual 
remuneration 
received 
626,784 

Future at risk 
remuneration 
received 
during the 
year (LTI) 
61,608 

534,904 

125,000 

659,904 

456,399 

30,000  

486,399 

456,131 

50,000 

506,131 

420,561 

25,000 

445,561 

416,461 

60,000 

476,461 

471,625 

40,000  

511,625 

442,850 

 88,570 

531,420 

417,284 

30,000  

447,284 

379,658 

50,000 

429,658 

401,465 

100,000  

501,465 

626,753 

225,000  

851,753 

356,000 

80,000 

436,000 

 -   

-   

 -   

3,115,118 
2,856,757 

340,000  3,455,118 
598,570  3,455,327 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 
- 

659,904 

486,399 

506,131 

- 

24,643 

- 

445,561 

23,657 

476,461 

511,625 

531,420 

447,284 

429,658 

501,465 

851,753 

436,000 

 - 

- 

23,807 

- 

23,657 

- 

23,807 

- 

17,743 

- 

3,455,118 
3,455,327 

198,922 
- 

Name 
Andrew 
Grech 

Ken 
Fowlie 

Wayne 
Brown 

Neil 
Kinsella 

Hayden 
Stephens 

Cath 
Evans 

Felicity 
Pantelidis 

Total 
Total 

Year 
FY15 

FY14 

FY15 

FY14 

FY15 

FY14 

FY15 

FY14 

FY15 

FY14 

FY15 

FY14 

FY15 

FY14 

FY15 
FY14 

There have been no material increases in the remuneration paid to executive KMP during the current year. Cath Evans 
received an overseas allowance in FY14 and FY15. 

56

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 35 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
  
   
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

5.0 Employee Share Scheme and Other Share Information 
This section provides: 

1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 

5. 
6. 

a description of the employee share schemes (“ESS”) the Group uses to provide equity rewards to employees; 
disclosures required in relation to ESS grants provided to executive KMP; 
disclosures required about ESS instruments issued; 
disclosures required in relation to Slater and Gordon Limited shares and other ESS instruments held by executive 
KMP; 
the Group’s share ownership guidelines; and 
the Group’s Securities Trading Policy. 

5.1 Employee Share Schemes operated by the Group  

Plan details 
Employee 
Ownership Plan 
(“EOP”) 
Date established: 
2006 

Type of 
instruments  Details 
Vesting 
Convertible 
Redeemable 
Ordinary 
Shares (“VCR 
shares”) 

Issue  of  VCR  shares  with  a  loan  (full 
recourse  but  interest  free)  equal  to  the 
subscription  amount  to  eligible  and  invited 
executives.  Vesting  was  dependent  on 
meeting  designated  performance  criteria 
(Balanced  Scorecard),  remaining  employed 
and repaying the loan. 

Equity Incentive 
Plan (“EIP”) 
Date established: 
Nov 2014 

Performance 
rights under 
Executive 
Equity 
Incentive 
Scheme 
(“EEIS”) 

A  performance  incentive  scheme  designed   
to reward participants with achieving market 
competitive business outcomes. Participants 
receive an award based on a predetermined 
formula, as approved by the Board from time 
to  time  based  on  market  standards  and 
trends. 

Equity Incentive 
Plan (“EIP”)  
Date established: 
Nov 2014 

Service rights 
under 
Deferred 
Short Term 
Incentive 
Scheme 
(“DSTIS”) 

A  deferred  short  term  incentive  scheme 
designed to reward participants in equity for 
a  portion  of  their  STI  earned  (up  to  33%) 
and defer vesting for two (2) years. 

to 

these 

(value 

shares 

shares 

incentives 

the  EOP  was 

Purpose 
to 
The  purpose  of 
encourage  key  participating  employees 
to  take  on  a  significant  stake  in  the 
Group over the course of their careers.  
As at 30 June 2015, there was a total of 
– 
833,334  VCR 
$2,966,669)  and  a  total  of  3,071,740 
ordinary  shares  subject 
to  disposal 
restrictions  (value  –  $10,935,394)  under 
the  EOP.    The  loans  outstanding  in 
totalled 
relation 
$8,690,109  which  are  only  repayable  if 
the VCR shares vest.  
The  purpose  of  the  EIP  is  to  provide 
to  selected 
annual  equity 
invited  executives  in  line  with  current 
market  standards  and  expectations.  The 
offer  terms  for  EIP  awards  are  flexible, 
but  meet  contemporary  LTI  design 
standards. The first grant of performance 
rights  under  this  plan  was  made  on  18 
November 2014. 
As at 30 June 2015, 54 employees held 
- 
496,000  performance rights 
is  subject 
$1,597,820).  Vesting 
to 
continuing 
and  meeting 
service 
performance hurdles. 
Also refer section 4.4.2. 
The  purpose  of  the  EIP  is  to  provide 
annual  equity 
invited 
to 
executives  in  line  with  current  market 
standards and expectations.  
No grants have been made in respect of 
the  STI  deferred  scheme  at  the  date  of 
this report. 
Also refer section 4.4.2. 

selected 

(Value 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 36 

57

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

5.1 Employee Share Schemes operated by the Group (continued) 

Equity Incentive 
Plan (“EIP”) 

Date established: 
Nov 2014 

Exempt  shares 
under Share Save 
Scheme 

participating 

The exempt share save scheme (“SSS”) 
allows 
Australian 
employees    to  acquire  up  to  $1,000  of 
Slater and Gordon shares each year tax 
free (subject to qualifying conditions) on 
a  co-contribution  basis  (The  November 
2014  offer  under  the  SSS  was  $500 
company and $500 individual). 

The  purpose  of  the  exempt  SSS  is  to 
encourage broad based employee equity 
participation in Australia on an affordable 
and sustainable basis in line with current 
market standards and expectations.  

As at 30 June 2015, 407 employees held 
65,527  exempt  shares  in  SSS  (Value  - 
$233,276).  

Share Incentive 
Plan (“SIP”) 

Ordinary shares 
under SIP 

Date established: 
Dec 2014 

The  SIP  allows  participating  United 
Kingdom  employees  to  acquire  Slater 
and  Gordon  shares  each  year  on  a  tax 
concessional basis (subject to qualifying 
conditions)  and  on  a  co-contribution 
basis  (The  December  offer  under  the 
SIP  was  £375  company  and  £375 
individual). 

based 

The  purpose  of  the  SIP  is  to  encourage 
broad 
equity 
participation  in  the  UK  on  an  affordable 
and sustainable basis in line with current 
market standards and expectations.  

employee 

As at 30 June 2015, 438 employees held 
84,576 shares in SIP (Value - $301,091).  

5.2 Employee Share Scheme Grants to Executive KMP 

5.2.1 Analysis of Share Based Payments Granted as Remuneration 
Details of vesting profile of the performance rights granted as remuneration to each executive KMP are set out below: 

Andrew Grech 
Ken Fowlie 
Wayne Brown 
Neil Kinsella 
Hayden Stephens 
Cath Evans 
Felicity Pantelidis 

Grant Date 
Nov 2014 
Nov 2014 
Nov 2014 
Dec 2014 
Nov 2014 
Dec 2014 
Nov 2014 

Number 
granted 
40,000 
16,000 
16,000 
16,000 
16,000 
16,000 
12,000 
            132,000  

Number 
vested 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

Number 
forfeited / 
lapsed 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

Intrinsic Value 
of vested 
performance 
rights ($) 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

The performance rights granted in FY15 have an exercise price of $0.00 and an expiration date of 30 September 2017. 
The performance rights granted to KMP during the year have a fair value (AASB 2) in the range of $2.4643 to $2.4799 at 
grant date.  

5.2.2 Vesting and Exercise of Performance Rights Granted as Remuneration 
During FY15, no performance rights vested or were exercised. 

58

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 37 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

5.2.3 Analysis of Movement in Performance Rights 
The movement in number and value during the financial year of performance rights over ordinary shares of Slater and 
Gordon Limited acquired under EIP LTI held by executive KMP is detailed below: 

Andrew Grech 

Ken Fowlie 

Wayne Brown 

Neil Kinsella 

Hayden Stephens 

Cath Evans 

Felicity Pantelidis 

Number 
held at 1 
July 2014 

Number 
granted 
in year 

Grant 
Value 
($) 

Number 
exercised 
in year 

Intrinsic 
Value ($) 

Number 
forfeited 
during 
year 

Number 
held at 30 
June 2015 

Intrinsic 
Value at 
30 June 
2015 ($) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

40,000 

61,608  

16,000 

24,643  

16,000 

23,657  

16,000 

23,807  

16,000 

23,657  

16,000 

23,807  

12,000 

17,743  

132,000  

198,922  

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

40,000 

142,400  

16,000 

56,960  

16,000 

56,960  

16,000 

56,960  

16,000 

56,960  

16,000 

56,960  

12,000 

42,720  

132,000  

469,920  

5.3 Potential Dilution if Performance Rights Vest and Ordinary Shares Issued  
At  the  date of  this  report,  the number  of ordinary  shares  that  would  be issued  if all  performance  rights  were  vested is 
132,000, as set out above. If fully vested this represents less than 0.04% of issued capital. Vesting of performance rights 
is conditional on service and performance conditions being met. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 38 

59

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
  
         
      
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
  
      
      
      
      
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

5.4 KMP Equity Interests  
In accordance with the Corporations Act 2001 (section 205G(1)), the Company is required to notify the interests (shares 
and rights to shares) of directors to the ASX. 

In the interests of transparency and completeness of disclosure, this information is provided for each NED (as required 
under the Corporations Act 2001) and all executive KMP. 

Please refer section 4.5.2 Hedging and margin lending prohibition for more information. 

The table below indicates Slater and Gordon Limited shareholding: 

John Skippen 

Ian Court 

Erica Lane 

Rhonda O’Donnell 

Andrew Grech 

Ken Fowlie 

Wayne Brown 

Neil Kinsella 

Hayden Stephens 

Cath Evans 

Felicity Pantelidis 

Number held at 
1 July 2014 

Acquisitions 

Disposals 

Number held at 
30 June 2015 

Intrinsic Value at 
30 June 2015 ($) 

-   

29,882  

150,000  

-   

25,000  

29,922  

20,000  

25,000  

-   

-   

-   

-   

25,000  

89,000  

59,804  

                 212,902  

170,000  

                 605,200  

25,000  

89,000  

5,295,495  

1,850,161  

395,000  

6,750,656  

            24,032,335  

5,096,221  

550,000  

305,103  

40,000  

-   

-   

5,646,221  

            20,100,547  

345,103  

              1,228,567  

640,668  

-   

213,541  

427,127  

              1,520,572  

4,255,115  

549,000  

-   

4,804,115  

            17,102,649  

4,110,476  

470,957  

500,000  

4,081,433  

            14,529,901  

-   

16,161  

-   

16,161  

57,533  

19,882,960  

3,576,201  

1,108,541  

22,350,620  

            79,568,206  

The  table  below  indicates  any  unvested  performance  rights  issued  to  executive  KMP,  but  still  subject  to  performance 
hurdles and service conditions:  

Andrew Grech 
Ken Fowlie 
Wayne Brown 
Neil Kinsella 
Hayden Stephens 
Cath Evans 
Felicity Pantelidis 

Unvested EOP 
Shares 

                             -   
                             -   
                             -   
                             -   
                             -   
                             -   
                             -   
                             -   

Unvested 
Performance Rights 
40,000 
16,000 
16,000 
16,000 
16,000 
16,000 
12,000 
                 132,000  

Total Number held at 
30 June 2015 
40,000 
16,000 
16,000 
16,000 
16,000 
16,000 
12,000 
                 132,000  

Intrinsic Value at 30 
June 2015 ($) 
                 142,400  
                    56,960  
                    56,960  
                    56,960  
                    56,960  
                    56,960  
                    42,720  
                 469,920  

60

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 39 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
  
                             
                    
                             
                    
                    
                    
                    
                             
                    
                 
                    
                             
                 
                             
                    
                             
                    
                    
              
              
                
              
              
                 
                             
              
                 
                    
                             
                 
                 
                             
                
                 
              
                 
                             
              
              
                 
                
              
                             
                    
                             
                    
                    
  
            
              
             
            
 
  
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

6.0 Service Contracts and Employment Agreements  

6.1 Employment Agreements: Executive Directors 
The following sets out details of the employment agreements relating to the executive directors Andrew Grech and Ken 
Fowlie. 

Length of contract 

Both executive directors are on rolling contracts, which is an ongoing employment contract until 
notice is given by either party. 

Contract Values  

Andrew Grech  

TFR: $565,000 per annum (inclusive of superannuation); 

STI:  Up  to  $175,000  (2014:  $150,000)  for  the  year  ended  30  June  2015,  inclusive  of 
superannuation,  at  the  discretion  of  the  Board,  based  on  the  achievement  of  certain  key 
performance  indicators.  The  key  performance  indicators  (“KPI”)  are  consistent  with  the 
Company’s  approved  business  plan  and  are  aligned  to  delivering  sustainable  value  to 
shareholders.  The  indicators  are  based  on  the  Balanced  Scorecard  methodology  and  cover 
Group  operational  and  financial  results  and  the  successful  implementation  of  Group  strategic 
and people development initiatives. A cash bonus of $125,000 was paid during the year ended 
30 June 2015 in respect to the year ended 30 June 2014. For the year ended 30 June 2015 a 
cash bonus of $35,000 has been provisionally determined. 

Ken Fowlie 

TFR: $450,000 per annum (inclusive of superannuation); 

STI:  up  to  $150,000  (2014:  $125,000)  for  the  year  ended  30  June  2015,  inclusive  of 
superannuation,  at  the  discretion  of  the  Board,  based  on  the  achievement  of  certain  key 
performance  indicators.  The  key  performance  indicators  are  consistent  with  the  Company’s 
approved  business  plan  and  are  aligned  to  delivering  sustainable  value  to  shareholders.  The 
indicators are based on the Balanced Scorecard methodology and cover Group operational and 
financial results and the successful implementation of Group strategic and people development 
initiatives. A cash bonus of $50,000 was paid during the year ended 30 June 2015 in respect to 
the year ended 30 June 2014. For the year ended 30 June 2015 a cash bonus of $30,000 has 
been provisionally determined. 

Performance 
Review 

The  performance  of  the  director  is  reviewed  annually  by  the  Nomination  and  Remuneration 
Committee and/or the Board. The director is assessed on achievement of the Group’s goals and 
budgets applicable to the year in review. 

The Committee also reviews the remuneration of the director on an annual basis. The findings 
are reported to, and approved by, the Board. 

Notice periods 

In order to terminate the employment arrangements, executive directors are required to provide 
the Company with three (3) months’ written notice.  

Resignation 

On  resignation,  unless  the  Board  determines  otherwise,  all  unvested  STI  or  LTI  benefits  are 
forfeited. 

Termination on 
notice by the 
Company 

The  Company  may  terminate  employment  by  providing  three  (3)  months’  written  notice  or 
payment in lieu of the notice period based on TFR. On termination, unless the Board determines 
otherwise, unvested STI or LTI benefits may be exercised or paid within 30 days of notice being 
given. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 40 

61

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

6.1 Employment Agreements: Executive Directors (continued) 
Redundancy 

If  the  Company  terminates  employment  for  reasons  of  redundancy,  under  Company  policy  a 
severance payment will be made of up to 12 months’ TFR. 

All STI and LTI benefits are either: 

• 

• 

released in full or on a pro-rata basis; or 

remain subject to performance criteria and vesting date, 

at the discretion of the Board with regard to the circumstances. 

Death or total and 
permanent disability 

On  death  or  total and  permanent  disability,  the  Board has  discretion  to  allow  all  unvested  STI 
and LTI benefits to vest. 

Termination for 
serious misconduct 

The  Company  may  immediately  terminate  employment  at  any  time  in  the  case  of  serious 
misconduct,  and  executive  directors  will  only  be  entitled  to  payment  of  TFR  up  to  the  date  of 
termination. 

On termination without notice by the Company in the event of serious misconduct: 

•  all unvested STI or LTI benefits will be forfeited; and 

•  any ESS instruments provided to the employee on vesting of STI or LTI awards that are held 

in trust, will be forfeited. 

Payment of statutory entitlements of long service leave and annual leave applies in all events of 
separation. 

Any  executive  who  was  one  of  the  seven  Vendor  Shareholders  is  a  party  to  the  Vendor 
Shareholder  Agreement  released  to  the  ASX  on  21  May  2007,  and  is  subject  to  minimum 
shareholding  requirements  and  the  consequences  which  flow  from  the  cessation  of  their 
employment as a term of that agreement. 

Statutory 
entitlements 

Vendor 
Shareholders 

Post-employment 
restraints 

The employment agreement contains a restraint of trade provision which applies for a period of 
12 months (or, in the case of a direct competitor of the Company, 24 months). 

62

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 41 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

6.2 Employment Agreements: Other Executive KMP 
The  following  sets  out  details  of  the  employment  agreements  relating  to  other  executive  KMP.  The  terms  for  all  other 
executive KMP are similar but do, on occasion, vary to suit the requirements of different countries. 

Length of contract 

All other executive KMP are on rolling contracts, which is an ongoing employment contract until 
notice is given by either party. 

Notice periods 

In order to terminate the employment arrangements, other executive KMP are required to provide 
the Company with at least three (3) months’ written notice.  

Resignation 

On  resignation,  unless  the  Board  determines  otherwise,  all  unvested  STI  or  LTI  benefits  are 
forfeited. 

Termination on 
notice by the 
Company 

The Company may terminate employment by providing between one and three months’ written 
notice or payment in lieu of the notice period based on TFR. On termination, unless the Board 
determines otherwise, unvested STI or LTI benefits may be exercised or paid within 30 days of 
notice being given. 

Redundancy 

If  the  Company  terminates  employment  for  reasons  of  redundancy,  under  policy  a  severance 
payment will be made of up to 12 months’ TFR.  

All STI and LTI benefits are either: 

• 

• 

released in full or on a pro-rata basis; or 

remain subject to performance criteria and vesting date, 

at the discretion of the Board with regard to the circumstances. 

Death or total and 
permanent 
disability 

On death or total and permanent disability, the Board has discretion to allow all unvested STI and 
LTI benefits to vest. 

Termination for 
serious 
misconduct 

The  Company  may  immediately  terminate  employment  at  any  time  in  the  case  of  serious 
misconduct, and other executive KMP will only be entitled to payment of TFR up to the date of 
termination. 

On termination without notice by the Company in the event of serious misconduct: 

•  all unvested STI or LTI benefits will be forfeited; and 

•  any ESS instruments provided to the employee on vesting of STI or LTI awards that are held 

in trust, will be forfeited. 

Payment of statutory entitlements of long service leave and annual leave applies in all events of 
separation. 

Any  executive  who  was  one  of  the  seven  Vendor  Shareholder  is  a  party  to  the  Vendor 
Shareholder  Agreement  released  to  the  ASX  on  21  May  2007,  and  is  subject  to  minimum 
shareholding  requirements  and  the  consequences  which  flow  from  the  cessation  of  their 
employment as a term of that agreement. 

Statutory 
entitlements 

Vendor 
Shareholders 

Post-employment 
restraints 

The employment agreement contains a restraint of trade provision which applies for a period of 
12 months (or, in the case of a direct competitor of the Company, 24 months). 

End of Remuneration Report. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 42 

63

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report  
Rounding of Amounts 
The amounts contained in the Directors’ Report and financial report have been rounded to the nearest thousand dollars 
(where  rounding  is  applicable)  under  the  option  available  to  the  Company  under  ASIC  Class  Order  98/0100.    The 
Company is an entity to which the Class Order applies. 

Signed in accordance with a resolution of the directors. 

John Skippen 

Chair 

Melbourne 

29 September 2015 

Andrew Grech 
Group Managing Director 

64

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 43 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SLATER & GORDON LIMITED AND CONTROLLED ENTITIES 

AUDITOR’S INDEPENDENCE DECLARATION  
TO THE DIRECTORS OF SLATER & GORDON LIMITED 

In relation to the independent audit for the year ended 30 June 2015, to the best of my knowledge and 
belief there have been: 

(i) 

(ii) 

No contraventions of the auditor independence requirements of the Corporations Act 2001; and  

No contraventions of any applicable code of professional conduct. 

This declaration is in respect of Slater & Gordon Limited and the entities it controlled during the year. 

A R FITZPATRICK  
Partner 

29 September 2015 

PITCHER PARTNERS 
Melbourne 

An independent Victorian Partnership ABN 27 975 255 196  
Level 19, 15 William Street, Melbourne VIC 3000        
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation        

Pitcher Partners is an association of independent firms 
Melbourne  |  Sydney  |  Perth  |  Adelaide  |  Brisbane  |  Newcastle 
An independent member of Baker Tilly International 

44 

65

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated  Statement  of  Profit  or  Loss  and  Other 
Comprehensive Income 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015  

Note 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 
Restated 

Revenue and other income 
Fee revenue – rendering of services 
Net movement in work in progress 
Services revenue 
Gain from bargain purchase 
Other income 
Total revenue and other income 

Less expenses 
Salaries and employee benefit expense 
Payments to former owners 
Share based payment expense to former owners 
Cost of sales 
Rental expense 
Advertising and marketing expense 
Administration and office expense 
Consultant fees 
Finance costs 
Bad and doubtful debts 
Depreciation and amortisation expense 
Costs associated with acquisitions 
Other expenses 
Profit before income tax expense  
Income tax expense 
Profit for the year after income tax expense 

Other comprehensive income, net of tax 
Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss: 
Foreign currency translation differences - foreign operations  
Changes in fair value of cash flow hedges 
Total items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or 
loss 
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax 
Total comprehensive income for the year, net of tax 

Profit for the year attributed to: 

Owners of the Company 

Non-controlling interests 

Total comprehensive income for the year attributed to: 

Owners of the Company 

Non-controlling interests 

Basic earnings per share (cents) 

Diluted earnings per share (cents) 

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements. 

4 
4 
4 

5 
5 

5 

5 

6 

20(b) 

20(a) 

21(a) 

22(a) 

25 

25 

486,267 
53,399 
20,472 
58,939 
8,232 
627,309 

(263,348) 
(13,933) 
(11,506) 
(16,662) 
(27,807) 
(56,289) 
(44,195) 
(6,595) 
(11,210) 
(11,585) 
(9,945) 
(23,769) 
(15,934) 
114,531 
(30,728) 
83,803 

63,542 

(409) 

63,133 
63,133 
146,936 

83,554 

249 
83,803 

146,583 
353 
146,936 

35.6 cents 

35.3 cents 

366,415 
45,398 
- 
19,762 
6,653 
438,228 

(200,270) 
(3,651) 
(5,379) 
- 
(22,005) 
(32,786) 
(36,391) 
(4,928) 
(7,846) 
(6,904) 
(6,955) 
(4,054) 
(11,312) 
95,747 
(27,511) 
68,236 

5,833 
(307) 

5,526 
5,526 
73,762 

68,020 
216 
68,236 

73,539 
223 
73,762 

33.8 cents 
33.2 cents 

66

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 45 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position 
As at 30 June 2015  

Note 

2015 
$’000 

Current assets 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Receivables 

Work in progress 

Current tax assets 

Other current assets 

Total current assets 

Non-current assets 

Property, plant and equipment 

Receivables 

Work in progress 

Intangible assets 

Deferred tax assets 

Other non-current assets 

Total non-current assets 

Total assets 

Current liabilities 

Payables 

Short term borrowings 

Current tax liabilities 

Other current liabilities 

Provisions 

Total current liabilities 

Non-current liabilities 

Payables 

Long term borrowings 

Deferred tax liabilities 

Derivative financial instruments 

Provisions 

Total non-current liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Net assets 

Equity 
Contributed equity 

Reserves 

Retained profits 

Total equity attributable to equity holders in the Company 

Non-controlling interest 

Total equity 

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements. 

8 

9 

10 

6 

11 

12 

9 

10 

13 

6 

14 

15 

16 

6 

17 

18 

15 

16 

6 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

96,985 
619,855 
553,177 
29,041 
30,022 
1,329,080 

31,959 

79,762 
272,721 
1,244,964 

83,356 

15,179 

1,727,941 
3,057,021 

636,522 

3,753 
22,556 
10,985 
34,487 
708,303 

3,121 
716,600 

180,508 
1,621 
11,875 

913,725 
1,622,028 
1,434,993 

1,098,345 
82,877 
253,147 
1,434,369 
624 
1,434,993 

2014 
$’000 
Restated 

25,270 

183,684 
278,072 
- 

12,403 
499,429 

12,964 

45,684 

189,262 
123,655 
22,264 

11,844 
405,673 
905,102 

190,527 
9,077 
2,481 
10,103 
20,124 
232,312 

7,385 

117,254 
123,621 
1,020 

4,760 
254,040 
486,352 
418,750 

217,049 
14,217 
187,213 
418,479 
271 
418,750 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 46 

67

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

2015 

Note 

Contributed 

Retained 

Cash Flow 

Foreign 

Share-based 

Total 

Non-

Total 

Equity 

Profits 

Hedging 

Currency 

Payment 

controlling 

Equity 

Balance as at 1 July 2014 (restated) 

Net Profit after tax for the year 

Total other comprehensive income for the year  20,22(a) 

Total comprehensive income for the year  

Transactions with owners in their capacity 

as owners 

Ordinary and VCR shares issued (net) 

Dividends paid 

Transfer from share based payments reserve 

Recognition of share based payments expense 

to former owners 

Costs of equity raising 

Performance Rights 

Total transactions with owners in their 

capacity as owners 

Balance as at 30 June 2015 

19 

7 

19 

20 

19 

20 

Reserve 

Translation 
Reserve 

$’000 

(780) 

- 

$’000 

10,009 

- 

- 

(409) 

63,438 

83,554 

(409) 

63,438 

$’000 

$’000 

217,049 

187,213 

83,554 

- 

- 

- 

Reserve 

interest 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

4,988 

418,479 

83,554 

63,029 

271 

249 

104 

418,750 

83,803 

63,133 

146,583 

353 

146,936 

896,352 

- 

- 

(17,620) 

6,199 

- 

(21,255) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

881,296 

(17,620) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

896,352 

(17,620) 

(6,199) 

- 

11,506 

11,506 

- 

(21,255) 

324 

324 

5,631 

869,307 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

896,352 

(17,620) 

- 

11,506 

(21,255) 

324 

869,307 

1,098,345 

253,147 

(1,189) 

73,447 

10,619  1,434,369 

624  1,434,993 

2014 

Restated 

Balance as at 1 July 2013 

Net Profit after tax for the year (previously 
reported) 

Total other comprehensive income for the year 
(previously reported) 

Contributed 

Retained 

Note 

Equity 

Profits 

Reserve 

$’000 

$’000 

212,373 

132,963 

$’000 

(473) 

Translation 
Reserve 
$’000 

4,183 

60,946 

- 

- 

20,22(a) 

             -                      - 

          (307)   

5,687 

Adjustments  

1(w) 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

(restated) 

Transactions with owners in their capacity as 
owners 

- 

- 

7,074 

- 

139 

68,020 

(307) 

5,826 

Ordinary and VCR shares issued (net) (restated) 

1(w),19 

4,405 

- 

Dividends paid  

Transfer from share based payments reserve 
(restated) 

Recognition of share based payments expense 
(restated) 

Costs of equity raising 

Equity contribution by non-controlling interest  

Total transactions with owners in their 
capacity as owners 
Balance as at 30 June 2014 (restated) 

7 

1(w),19 

1(w),20 

19 

22(a) 

- 

(13,770) 

391 

- 

(120) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

4,676 

(13,770) 

Cash Flow 

Foreign 

Share-based 

Total 

Non-

Hedging 

Currency 

Payment 

Reserve 

Total 

Equity 

controlling 

interest 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

349,046 

161 

349,207 

60,946 

159 

61,105 

5,380 

7 

5,387 

7,213 

57 

7,270 

73,539 

223 

73,762 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

4,405 

(13,770) 

(391) 

- 

5,379 

5,379 

- 

- 

(120) 

- 

4,988 

(4,106) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(113) 

(113) 

4,405 

(13,770) 

- 

5,379 

(120) 

(113) 

(4,219) 

217,049 

187,213 

(780) 

10,009 

4,988 

418,479 

271 

418,750 

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements. 

68

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 47 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Cash flow from operating activities 

Receipts from customers 

Payments to suppliers and employees 

Payments to former owners 

Interest received 

Borrowing costs 

Income tax paid 

Net cash provided by operating activities 

Cash flow from investing activities 
Payment for software development 

Payment for plant and equipment 

Costs associated with acquisition of businesses 

Costs associated with originating loans 

Payment for acquisition of businesses, net of cash in subsidiaries 

Payment for acquisition of businesses – deferred consideration 

Note 

2015 
$’000 

4(a) 

6 

23(b) 

520,954 
(464,980) 
(2,592) 
2,294 
(8,865) 

(6,049) 
40,762 

(9,166) 

(13,142) 

(23,662) 

(9,464) 

(1,333,973) 

(14,720) 

2014 
$’000 
Restated 

410,142 

(342,758) 

- 

401 

(5,344) 

(8,006) 

54,435 

(1,485) 

(3,284) 

(4,054) 

- 

(98,464) 

(18,309) 

Net cash used in investing activities 

(1,404,127) 

(125,596) 

Cash flow from financing activities 

Proceeds from share issue 
Repayment to related parties 
Costs of raising equity 
Proceeds from related parties and employees  
Proceeds from borrowings 

Repayment of borrowings 

Dividends paid 

Net cash provided by financing activities 

Net increase in cash held 

Effect of exchange rate fluctuations on cash held 

Cash at beginning of financial year 

Cash at end of financial year 

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements. 

19 

23(a) 

890,939 
(469) 

(18,438) 

3,825 

594,068 

(43,966) 

(15,924) 

1,410,035 

46,670 

25,045 

25,270 

96,985 

- 

- 

(120) 

5,247 

154,770 

(73,695) 

(9,907) 

76,295 

5,134 

80 

20,056 

25,270 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 48 

69

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 1:  Statement of Significant Accounting Policies 
The following is a summary of significant accounting policies adopted by the consolidated entity in the preparation and 
presentation of the financial report. The accounting policies have been consistently applied, unless otherwise stated. 

(a) 

Basis of preparation of the financial report 

Slater  and  Gordon  Limited  is  a  company  limited  by  shares,  incorporated  and  domiciled  in  Australia.  The  consolidated 
financial statements comprise the Company and its controlled entities referred to in Note 30, together referred to as the 
Group and individually as Group Entities.   

This  financial  report  is  a  general  purpose  financial  report  that  has  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  Australian 
Accounting  Standards,  Interpretations  and  other  applicable  authoritative  pronouncements  of  the  Australian  Accounting 
Standards Board and the Corporations Act 2001. 

Slater and Gordon Limited is a for-profit entity for the purpose of preparing the financial statements.  

The financial report was authorised for issue by the directors as at the date of the Directors’ Report. 

Compliance with IFRS 

The  consolidated  financial  statements  of  Slater  and  Gordon  Limited  also  comply  with  the  International  Financial 
Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”). 

Historical cost convention 

The financial report has been prepared under the historical cost convention, as modified by revaluations to fair value for 
certain classes of assets as described in the accounting policies. 

Significant accounting estimates 

The  preparation  of  the  financial  report  requires  the  use  of  certain  estimates  and  judgements  in  applying  the  entity’s 
accounting policies. Those estimates and judgements significant to the financial report are disclosed in Note 2. 

Going concern 

The financial report has been prepared on a going concern basis.  

(b) 

Principles of consolidation 

The  consolidated  financial  statements  are  those  of  the  consolidated  entity,  comprising  the  financial  statements  of  the 
parent entity and of all entities which the parent entity controls. The Group controls an entity when it is exposed, or has 
rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power 
over the entity. 

The financial statements of subsidiaries are prepared for the same reporting period as the parent entity, using consistent 
accounting policies. Adjustments are made to bring into line any dissimilar accounting policies which may exist.  

All  inter-company  balances  and  transactions,  including  any  unrealised  profits  or  losses,  have  been  eliminated  on 
consolidation. Subsidiaries are consolidated from the date on which control is established and are de-recognised from 
the date that control ceases. 

Non-controlling  interests  in  the  results  of  subsidiaries  are  shown  separately  in  the  consolidated  statement  of 
comprehensive income and consolidated statement of financial position.  

Any  changes  in  the  Group’s ownership  interests  in  subsidiaries  that  do  not  result  in  the  Group  losing  control  over  the 
subsidiaries are accounted for as equity transactions. 

70

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 49 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
  
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 1:  Statement of Significant Accounting Policies (continued) 
(c) 

Revenue  

Rendering of services  

It is the Group’s policy to recognise revenue in accordance with the revenue recognition criteria described in AASB 118 
Revenue. 

Revenue  from  rendering  of  services  to  customers  is  recognised  upon  delivery  of  the  service  to  the  customer.  The 
majority of revenue from services is comprised of fees billed, with the remaining amount representing movement in work 
in progress and services revenue. Revenue is recognised to the extent that it is probable that the economic benefit will 
flow  to  the  entity  and  that  revenue  can  be  reliably  measured.  The  Group  measures  revenue  at  the  fair  value  of  the 
consideration received or receivable.  

The Group has implemented practice standards within each region to monitor the progression of individual cases, and 
thereby to determine the likely outcome of the transaction. The practice standards are based on the Group’s significant 
depth of experience in progressing the various types of legal work undertaken to conclusion. 

The Group renders the following key services to customers: 

•  provision of legal services for personal injury claims; 
•  provision of services for general law incorporating project litigation; and 
•  provision  of  legal  and  complementary  services  from  SGS,  acquired  from  Quindell  Plc  on  29  May  2015.  Refer  to 

Business Combinations Note 31.   

Revenue resulting from work in progress movement 

Revenue includes the difference in Work In Progress value between reporting periods. The revenue recognised excludes 
the  net  movement  in  Work  In  Progress  contributed  by  the  acquisition  of  client  matters  arising  from  a  business 
combination or file specific acquisition.   

In relation to Personal Injury legal matters, the Group identifies individual contracts at a similar stage of completion. This 
means that the rights and obligations contained in each contract do not vary materially from one contract to another in 
each category of work that the Group typically performs for clients. 

The measurement of this component of revenue is based upon: 

• 
• 
• 

the estimate of fees upon completion of the matter; 
the probability of the success of the matter; and 
the percentage of completion of the matter. 

On  an  individual client matter  basis  this  means  that  as Work  in  Progress increases  on a  client matter,  the  increase in 
Work  in  Progress  is  recorded  as  a  revenue  item.  When  a  matter  is  finalised,  the  full  amount  of  the  actual  fees  for 
services  is  invoiced  or billed to  the client and  recorded as  revenue.  This  is  then  offset by  the  work  in  progress  matter 
being written back to nil (recognised as a negative revenue amount) neutralising the previously recorded revenue. 

Provision of legal and other services resulting from Slater Gordon Solutions 

Legal Services 

These  services  relate  to  road  traffic  accident  (“RTA”),  employee  liability/public  liability  (“ELPL”)  and  noise  induced 
hearing loss (“NIHL”) cases. Revenue is recognised by stage of completion, consistent with the treatment outlined above 
for provision of services from personal injury claims.    

Other services include replacement vehicle hire, vehicle repair, provision of medical reports and rehabilitation. 

Vehicle hire and repair  

Revenue relating to car hire, repair and claims management services is measured at the fair value of the consideration 
receivable, net of Value Added Tax (“VAT”) and other sales taxes. Revenue is recognised when services are provided, 
including an appropriate proportion of any services that are in progress at the reporting date. It is recognised only when it 
can be estimated reliably.  

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 50 

71

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 1:  Statement of Significant Accounting Policies (continued) 
(c) 

Revenue (continued) 

Hire revenue is recognised on a stage of completion basis as it is accrued on a daily basis for each day that the vehicle 
is on the road with the client. Revenue and costs are accrued on each specific vehicle at the GTA (the Association of 
British Insurers General Terms of Agreement for credit hire arrangements) or contracted rates. 

The benefit of the service to the customer is generated over time and the ability to estimate the stage of completion is 
high given it is based on actual days and known rates. 

Vehicle repair revenue is recognised on a ‘significant act’ basis whereby the significant act is the completion of a repair. 
At this point the obligation is fulfilled. The corresponding cost of repair is also recognised at this point. 

Administration fee revenue on car hire/repair as set under the GTA is recognised at the start of the respective service. 

Medical Reports and Services  

Revenue is earned from the procurement of medical reports and other services. 

The  instructing  party  will  request  SGS  to  procure  a  service.  An  appointment  is  arranged  with  a  third  party  medical 
practitioner. The significant event for revenue recognition is considered to be the attendance at the appointment of the 
instructing  party’s  client.  At  this  point  there  is  certainty  over  the  outcome.  Therefore,  medical  reports  revenue  is 
recognised  once  an  appointment  has  been  attended  as  this  is  considered  to  be  the  significant  act  in  accordance  with 
AASB 118.  

Rehabilitation Services 

Revenue  is  recognised  when  the  initial  assessment  appointment  has  been  attended  as  this  is  considered  to  be  the 
‘significant  act’.  The  medical  practitioner  will  confirm  the  course  of  treatment  required  in  the  initial  assessment.  For 
rehabilitation, the instructing party is liable for the costs as they have instructed the services on behalf of an individual.  

Interest Revenue 

Interest revenue is recognised when it becomes receivable on a proportional basis taking into account the interest rates 
applicable to the financial assets. 

Other revenue 

Other revenue is recognised when the right to receive the revenue has been established. 

All revenue is stated net of the amount of goods and services tax (“GST”) or UK equivalent value added tax (“VAT”). 

(d) 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Cash  and  cash  equivalents  comprise  cash  on  hand,  deposits  held  at  call  with  banks  and  short-term  deposits  with  an 
original maturity of three months or less. Bank overdrafts are shown within short-term borrowings in current liabilities on 
the consolidated statement of financial position. For the purposes of the consolidated statement of cash flows, cash and 
cash equivalents consist of cash and cash equivalents as defined above, net of outstanding banking overdrafts. 

(e) 

Disbursements  

Disbursements are only recognised when it is assessed that a reimbursement will be received from the client or on his or 
her behalf. The disbursements are treated as a separate asset. The amount recognised for the expected reimbursement 
does not exceed the relevant costs incurred.  

The amount of any expected reimbursement is reduced by an allowance for non-recovery based on past experience. 

(f) 

Property, plant and equipment 

Property,  plant  and  equipment  is  measured  at  cost  less  accumulated  depreciation  and  any  accumulated  impairment 
losses. 

The carrying amount of property, plant and equipment is reviewed annually by directors to ensure it is not in excess of 
the  recoverable  amount  from  those  assets.  Recoverable  amount  is  the  higher  of  fair  value  less  costs  of  disposal  and 
value in use. Value in use is based on estimated future cash flows, discounted to their present value using a post-tax 
discount rate that reflects the current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset.  

72

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 51 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 1:  Statement of Significant Accounting Policies (continued) 
(f) 

Property, plant and equipment (continued) 

Depreciation 

Land is not depreciated.  

The  depreciable  amounts  of  all  other  property,  plant  and  equipment  are  depreciated  over  their  estimated  useful  lives, 
commencing from the time the asset is held ready for use. Leased assets are depreciated over the shorter of the lease 
term and  their  useful  lives unless  it is  reasonably certain  that  the  Group  will  obtain  ownership  by  the  end  of  the  lease 
term.  

The depreciation rates used for each class of assets are: 

Class of fixed asset 

Plant and equipment 

Low value asset pool 

Depreciation rates 

Depreciation method 

5.00 – 66.67% 

Straight Line and Diminishing Value 

18.75 – 37.50% 

Diminishing value 

An asset’s residual value and useful life is reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at the end of each reporting period. An 
asset’s carrying amount is written down immediately to its recoverable amount if the asset’s carrying amount is greater 
than its estimated recoverable amount. Any impairment losses are recognised in the profit or loss.  

Gains and losses on disposal are determined by comparing proceeds with the carrying amount. These gains and losses 
are included in the profit or loss. 

(g) 

Leases 

Leases  are  classified  at  their inception  as  either  operating or  finance leases  based  on  the  economic substance of  the 
agreement so as to reflect the risks and benefits incidental to ownership. 

Finance leases 

Leases of fixed assets, where substantially all of the risks and benefits incidental to ownership of the asset, but not the 
legal  ownership,  are  transferred  to  the  consolidated  entity  are  classified  as  finance  leases.  Finance  leases  are 
capitalised,  recording  an  asset  and  liability  equal  to  the  fair  value or, if  lower,  the  present  value  of the  minimum  lease 
payments, including any guaranteed residual values. The interest expense is calculated using the interest rate implicit in 
the lease and is included in finance costs in the statement of comprehensive income. Leased assets are depreciated on 
a straight line basis over their estimated useful lives where it is likely the consolidated entity will obtain ownership of the 
asset, or over the term of the lease. Lease payments are allocated between the reduction of the lease liability and the 
lease interest expense for the period. 

Operating leases 

Leases  where  the  lessor  retains  substantially  all  the  risks  and  benefits  of  ownership  of  the  asset  are  classified  as 
operating  leases.  Operating  lease  payments  are  recognised  as  an  expense  in  the  consolidated  statement  of 
comprehensive  income  on  a  straight-line  basis  over  the  lease  term.  Lease  incentives  under  operating  leases  are 
recognised as a liability and amortised on a straight-line basis over the life of the lease. 

(h)  Work in progress (“WIP”) 

Work in progress represents client cases which have not yet reached a conclusion and comprises personal injury cases, 
services performed ancillary to personal injury cases, non-personal injury cases and project litigation cases.  

The Group allocates work in progress between current and non-current classifications based on a historical analysis of 
the Group’s work in progress balances and velocity rates to determine expected timing of settlements.  Refer Note 1(w) 
regarding changes to account classification during the financial year ended 30 June 2015.  

Work in progress arising from legal services performed by Slater and Gordon Lawyers 

Work  in  progress  is  carried  at  either  cost  or  it  may  include  profit  recognised  to  date  based  on  the  value  of  work 
completed. The following are the methodologies adopted for each division in determining the value of work in progress: 
Personal Injury Law work in progress 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 52 

73

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 1:  Statement of Significant Accounting Policies (continued) 
(h)  Work in progress (“WIP”) (continued) 

Personal  injury  law  work  in  progress  is  measured  using  the  regional  practice  standards  applicable  to  each  region 
established by the Group to determine the stage of completion using a methodology: 

a) 

b) 

to examine the nature and extent of work performed for individual cases; and 

to identify services performed to date as a percentage of total services to be performed. 

The  regional  practice  standards  incorporate  value  pricing  and  fixed  fee  valuations,  applying  a  probability  of  success 
factor, making allowance for the “No Win No Fee” conditional fee arrangements, under which the Personal Injury practice 
operates. 

The Group conducts a detailed review of the stage of completion calculations for all cases on a half-yearly basis. When 
necessary, the Group revises the estimates of revenue for the services performed. The need for such revisions does not 
necessarily  indicate  that  the  outcome  of the  transaction cannot  be estimated  reliably,  rather  it  implicitly  includes some 
estimation uncertainty. (Refer Note 2(b) Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgments – Work in progress.) 

General Law work in progress 

For estate, probate, industrial law, commercial law and funded project litigation matters, time records and historical levels 
of fees billed are used in determining the value of work completed. 

Project litigation work in progress 

Project  litigation  matters  are  defined  as  any  matters  where  total  professional  fees  and/or  disbursements  are  likely  to 
exceed $1.0 million over the course of the conduct of the matter(s).  

Work in progress in project litigation matters is recognised on self-funded project litigation matters for which a favourable 
outcome is considered probable. For such projects, work in progress is initially valued at costs incurred less a discount 
for the likely recovery of those costs. Cost includes both variable and fixed costs directly related to cases and those that 
can be attributed to case activity and that can be allocated to specific projects on a reasonable basis. Where a project 
litigation  matter  has  reached  partial  or  full  settlement  and  an  enforceable  agreement  to  recover  the  professional  fees 
exists,  work  in  progress  is  valued  at  the  settled  fee  amount  and  discounted  for  percentage  file  completion,  and  the 
probability  of  the  full  fee  being  collected.  Project  litigation  matters  that  are  not  expected  to  be  realised  within  twelve 
months are classified as non-current.  

Work in progress arising from services provided by Slater Gordon Solutions  

Legal Services 

Revenue  from  work  in  progress  from  non-hearing  loss  files  (RTA,  ELPL)  is  recognised  based  on  the  following  key 
milestones on a matter. 

i) 

ii) 

Validation – this is the initial stage of the case; 

Collation pre-med – matters with claim notification form (“CNF”) submitted, but pre-receipt of medical report; 

iii) 

Collation post-med – medical report received, but prior to submission of settlement pack; 

iv) 

Valuation – settlement pack submitted, but prior to issue of proceedings; and 

v) 

Issue – post issue of proceedings. 

The  measurement  of  this  component  of  revenue  is  consistent  with  the  Group  approach  for  valuing  WIP  based  on 
average fees, probability of success and percentage completion. 

No  value  of  work  in  progress  has  been  recognised  for  Noise  Induced  Hearing  Loss  (“NIHL”)  files  as  the  amount  of 
revenue cannot at this stage (30 June 2015) be measured reliably.   

74

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 53 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 1:  Statement of Significant Accounting Policies (continued) 
(h)  Work in progress (“WIP”) (continued) 

Vehicle hire and repair 

Work in progress is recognised for the following transactions:  

i) 

ii) 

Incomplete WIP – where a car hire is still in use; and 

Billing not completed – this occurs where the car hire has been returned or repairs completed where the invoice is 
still outstanding (due to the time period required for all documentation to be in place before it is issued). 

Work  in  progress  is  recognised  based  on  the  probable  inflow  of  economic  benefits  flowing  to  the  entity  which  occurs 
before  settlement  by  the  insurer.  Settlement  could  take  considerable  time  to  recover.  A  dilution  rate  is  applied  on  the 
invoice to recognise the fact that there may be a settlement adjustment with the insurer if the insurer disputes any costs. 
This also takes into account the fact that some cases may not be ‘no fault’. 

Medical reports and rehabilitation services 

Work in progress  is  recognised  when  an  appointment has  been attended.  The  amount  will  remain  in  work  in  progress 
until  the  discharge  form  has  been  received  at  which  point  the  rehabilitation  service  is  invoiced.  This  value  remains  in 
work in progress until the number of sessions required is known at which point the invoice is raised.  

Work in progress is calculated based on the average amount charged out, based on historic cases less a historic dilution 
factor applied to reflect the fact that not all amounts will be billed. 

For medical reports, the work in progress balance is calculated when the appointment is attended. 

(i) 

Business combinations 

A business combination is a transaction or other event in which an acquirer obtains control of one or more businesses 
and  results  in  the  consolidation  of  the  assets  and  liabilities  acquired.  Business  combinations  are  accounted  for  by 
applying the acquisition method. 

The consideration transferred is the sum of the acquisition-date fair values of the assets transferred, equity instruments 
issued  or  liabilities  incurred  by  the  acquirer  to  former  owners  of  the  acquired.  Deferred  consideration  payable  is 
measured at fair value. Contingent consideration to be transferred by the acquirer is recognised at the acquisition-date 
fair value. 

Goodwill  is  recognised  initially  at  the  excess  over  the  aggregate  of  the  consideration  transferred,  the  fair  value  of  the 
non-controlling interest, and the acquisition date fair value of the acquirer’s previously held equity interest (in case of step 
acquisition), less the fair value of the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed. 

If the fair value of the acquirer's interest is greater than the aggregate of the consideration transferred, the fair value of 
the non-controlling interest, and the acquisition date fair value of the acquirer’s previously held equity interest (in case of 
step acquisition), the gain is immediately recognised in the profit or loss as gain from bargain purchases. 

In conjunction with the business combination transaction there may be a transfer of assets between controlled entities as 
part of restructuring the acquired business. The parent accounts for such transfers through reallocation of the cost of the 
investments in its statement of financial position. Acquisition related costs are expensed as incurred. 

Refer to Note 1(w) for the accounting policy change in respect of accounting for business combinations. 

(j) 

Intangibles and goodwill  

Software development costs 

Expenditure on research activities is recognised as an expense in the period in which it is incurred. 

Development costs are capitalised when it is probable that the project will be a success considering its commercial and 
technical feasibility; the entity is able to use or sell the asset; the entity has sufficient resources and intent to complete 
the  development  and  its  costs  can  be  measured  reliably.  Capitalised  development  expenditure  is  stated  at  cost  less 
accumulated  amortisation.  Amortisation  is  calculated  using  a  straight-line  method  to  allocate  the  cost  of  the  intangible 
assets over their estimated useful lives.  Amortisation commences when the intangible asset is available for use. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 54 

75

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 1:  Statement of Significant Accounting Policies (continued) 
(j) 

Intangibles and goodwill (continued) 

Software development costs are carried at cost less accumulated amortisation and any accumulated impairment losses.  
These assets have been assessed as having a finite useful life and once operating in the Group are amortised over the 
useful life of 5-8 years. 

Trademarks and Brand names 

Trademarks acquired in a business combination and recognised separately from goodwill are initially recognised at their 
fair  value  at  the  acquisition  date  (which  is  regarded  as  their  cost).  The  fair  value  of  trademarks  is  based  on  the 
discounted estimated royalty payments that have been avoided as a result of the trademark being owned. 

Trademarks are carried at cost less accumulated amortisation and any accumulated impairment losses. Trademarks that 
have been assessed as having a finite useful life are amortised over their finite life.  

Brand  names  acquired  as  part  of  the  acquisition  of  Slater  Gordon  Solutions  have  been  carried  at  cost.  These  brand 
names have been assessed as having an indefinite useful life, therefore no amortisation is applicable. 

Customer relationships 

The fair value of customer relationships acquired in a business combination is determined using the multi-period excess 
earnings  method,  whereby  the  subject  asset  is  valued  after  deducting  a  fair  return  on  all  other  assets  that  are  part  of 
creating the related cash flows. They are assessed as having a finite useful life and are amortised over their useful life. 

Goodwill 

Goodwill  is  initially  measured  as  the  excess  over  the  aggregate  of  the  consideration  transferred,  the  fair  value  (or 
proportionate  share  of  net  assets  value)  of  the  non-controlling  interest,  and  the  acquisition  date  fair  value  of  the 
acquirer’s  previously  held  equity  interest  (in  case  of  step  acquisition),  less  the  fair  value  of  the  identifiable  assets 
acquired and liabilities assumed.  

Goodwill is not amortised, but is tested annually for impairment or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances 
indicate that it might be impaired. Goodwill is carried at cost less any accumulated impairment losses.  

(k) 

Impairment of non-financial assets 

Goodwill, intangible assets not yet ready for use and intangible assets that have an indefinite useful life are not subject to 
amortisation and are therefore tested annually for impairment or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances 
indicate that they might be impaired. Assets subject to annual depreciation or amortisation are reviewed for impairment 
whenever events or circumstances arise that indicates that the carrying amount of the asset may be impaired.  

An  impairment  loss  is  recognised  where  the  carrying  amount  of  the  asset  exceeds  its  recoverable  amount.  The 
recoverable amount of an asset is defined as the higher of its fair value less costs of disposal and value in use. 

For the purposes of impairment testing, assets are grouped at the lowest levels for which there are separately identifiable 
cash flows (cash-generating units). 

(l) 

Taxation 

Taxation consists of income tax, Goods and Services Tax (“GST”) and Value Added Tax (“VAT”). 

Income tax 

Income tax expense comprises current and deferred tax.  

Current tax 

Current income tax expense or benefit is the tax payable / receivable on the current period's taxable income based on 
the applicable income tax rate for each jurisdiction adjusted by changes in deferred tax assets and liabilities attributable 
to temporary differences and unused tax loses. The current income tax charge is calculated on the basis of the tax laws 
enacted  or  substantively  enacted  at  the  end  of  the  reporting  period  in  the  countries  where  the  Group  operates  and 
generates taxable income.  

76

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 55 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 1:  Statement of Significant Accounting Policies (continued) 
(l) 

Taxation (continued) 

Deferred tax 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognised for temporary differences at the applicable tax rates when the assets 
are  expected  to  be  recovered  or  liabilities  are  settled.  Deferred  tax  liabilities  are  not  recognised  if  they  arise  from  the 
initial recognition of goodwill. Deferred tax is also not accounted for if it arises from initial recognition of an asset or 

liability in a transaction, other than a business combination, and at the time of the transaction affects neither accounting 
nor taxable profit or loss. 

Deferred tax assets are recognised for deductible temporary differences and unused tax losses only if it is probable that 
future  taxable  amounts  will  be  available  to  utilise  those  temporary  differences  and  losses.  Deferred  tax  assets  are 
reviewed at each reporting date and are reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that the related tax benefit will 
be realised; such reductions are reversed when the probability of future taxable profits improves. Unrecognised deferred 
tax assets are reassessed at each reporting date and recognised to the extent that it has become probable that future 
taxable profits will be available against which they can be used.  

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the year when the asset is 
realised or the liability is settled, based on tax rates (and tax laws) that have been enacted or substantively enacted at 
the reporting date. 

Current  and  deferred  tax  for  the  year  are  recognised  in  profit  or  loss,  except  when  they  relate  to  items  that  are 
recognised  in  other  comprehensive  income  or  directly  in  equity,  in  which  case  the  current  and  deferred  tax  are  also 
recognised  in  other  comprehensive  income  or  directly  in  equity  respectively.  Where  current  tax  or  deferred  tax  arises 
from  the  initial  accounting  for  a  business  combination,  the  tax  effect  is  included  in  the  accounting  for  the  business 
combination. 

Tax consolidation (applicable to Australian entities only) 

The Company and its wholly-owned Australian domiciled entities except for Slater & Gordon Lawyers listed in Note 30 
have implemented the tax consolidation legislation and have formed a tax-consolidated group from 28 April 2011. As a 
consequence, the Company and its controlled entities which comprise the tax consolidated group are taxed as a single 
entity.  New Australian domiciled entities acquired during the current year have joined the tax consolidation group from 
the date of acquisition (refer to Note 31).  The head entity within the tax consolidated group is Slater and Gordon Limited.  
The parent entity and subsidiaries in the tax-consolidated group have entered into a tax funding arrangement such that 
each entity in the tax-consolidated group recognises the assets, liabilities, expenses and revenue in relation to its own 
transactions, events and balances only. This means that: 

• 

• 

the  parent  entity  recognises  all  current  and  deferred  tax  amounts  relating  to  its  own  transactions,  events  and 
balances only; 
the  subsidiaries  recognise  current  or deferred  tax  amounts arising  in  respect  of their  own  transactions,  events  and 
balances; 

•  current tax liabilities and deferred tax assets arising in respect of tax losses are transferred from the subsidiary to the 

head entity as inter-company payables or receivables. 

The  tax-consolidated  group  also  has  a  tax  sharing  agreement  in  place  to  limit  the  liability  of  subsidiaries  in  the  tax-
consolidated group arising under the joint and several liability requirements of the tax consolidation system. No amounts 
have been recognised in the financial statements in respect of this agreement on the basis that the possibility of default 
is remote. 

Goods and Services Tax (“GST”) and Value Added Tax (“VAT”) 

Revenue, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount of GST/VAT, except where the GST/VAT incurred is 
not recoverable from the Australian Taxation Office (“ATO”), UK Her Majesty’s Revenue and Customs (“HMRC”) or Malta 
Inland  Revenue  (“MIR”)  and  is  therefore  recognised  as  part  of  the  asset’s  cost  or  as  part  of  the  expense  item. 
Receivables and payables are stated inclusive of GST/VAT. 

The net amount of GST/VAT recoverable from, or payable to, the ATO/HMRC/MIR is included as part of receivables or 
payables in the consolidated statement of financial position. 

Cash  flows  are  presented  in  the  statement  of  cash  flows  on  a  gross  basis,  except  for  the  GST/VAT  component  of 
investing  and  financing  activities,  which  are  disclosed  as  operating  cash  flows.  Commitments  and  contingencies  are 
disclosed net of the amount of GST/VAT recoverable from, or payable to, the relevant taxation authority. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 56 

77

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 1:  Statement of Significant Accounting Policies (continued) 
(m)  Provisions 

Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of past events, for 
which it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will result in an amount that can be reliably measured. 

A provision for solicitor liability claims is made for the potential future cost of claims brought against the Group by former 
clients.  The  provision  is  determined  by  including  the  estimated  maximum  amount  payable  by  the  Group  under  its 
Professional Indemnity Insurance Policy on all claims notified to its insurer. 

(n) 

Employee Benefits 

Short-term employee benefit obligations 

Liabilities arising in respect of wages and salaries, annual leave and any other employee benefits expected to be settled 
within  twelve  months  of  the  reporting  date  are  measured  at  the  amounts  based  on  remuneration  rates  which  are 
expected  to  be  paid  when  the  liability  is  settled.  The  expected  cost  of  short-term  employee  benefits  in  the  form  of 
compensated absences such as annual leave and accumulated sick leave is recognised in the provision for employee 
benefits. All other short-term employee benefit obligations are presented as payables. 

Long-term employee benefit obligations  

The provision for employee benefits in respect of long service leave and annual leave payable later than one year have 
been  measured  at  the  present  value  of  the  estimated  future  cash  outflows  to  be  made  for  those  benefits.  These 
estimated  future cash  flows  have  been  discounted  using market  yields,  at  the  reporting date, on corporate  bonds  with 
matching terms to maturity. 

Employee benefit obligations are presented as current liabilities in the consolidated statement of financial position if the 
entity  does  not  have  an  unconditional  right  to  defer  settlement  for  at  least  twelve  months  after  the  reporting  date, 
regardless of when the actual settlement is expected to occur. 

Defined contribution superannuation plan 

The Group makes contributions to defined contribution superannuation plans in respect of employee services rendered 
during  the  year.  These  superannuation  contributions  are  recognised  as  an  expense  in  the  same  period  when  the 
employee services are received. 

Bonus plan  

The Group recognises a provision when a bonus is payable in accordance with the employee’s contract of employment 
and the amount can be reliably measured.  

Termination benefits 

Termination  benefits  are  payable  when  employment  of  an  employee  or  group  of  employees  is  terminated  before  the 
normal  retirement  date,  or  when  the  entity  provides  termination  benefits  as  a  result  of  an  offer  made  and  accepted  in 
order to encourage voluntary redundancy.  

The  Group  recognises  a  provision  for  termination  benefits  when  the  entity  can  no  longer  withdraw  the  offer  of  those 
benefits, or if earlier, when the termination benefits are included in a formal restructuring plan that has been announced 
to those affected by it. If benefits are not expected to be settled wholly within 12 months of the reporting date, then they 
are discounted and presented as non-current liabilities.  

(o) 

Share-based payment transactions 

Equity-settled share-based payments to employees and others providing similar services are measured at the fair value 
of the equity instruments at the grant date. 

The consolidated entity operates share-based payment employee share and option schemes. The fair value of the equity 
to which employees become entitled is measured at grant date and recognised as an expense over the vesting period, 
with a corresponding increase to an equity account. Details regarding the determination of the fair value of equity-settled 
share-based  transactions  are  set  out  in  Note  27.  In  respect  of  share-based  payments  that  are  dependent  on  the 
satisfaction of performance conditions, the number of shares and options expected to vest is reviewed and adjusted at 
each reporting date. The amount recognised for services received as consideration for these equity instruments granted 
is adjusted to reflect the best estimate of the number of equity instruments that eventually vest. 

78

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 57 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 1:  Statement of Significant Accounting Policies (continued) 
(o) 

Share-based payment transactions (continued) 

Equity-settled share-based payment transactions with parties other than employees are measured at the fair value of the 
goods or services received, except where that fair value cannot be estimated reliably, in which case they are measured 

at the fair value of the equity instruments granted, measured at the date the entity obtains the goods or the counterparty 
renders the service. 

The Group operates an Employee Ownership Plan (“EOP”). The EOP allows employees to purchase Vesting Convertible 
Redeemable (“VCR”) shares in the Company by way of an interest-free loan. Per the policy, the loan has been recorded 
as a financial instrument.  

•  The VCR shares vest over a specified period of time. At the time of vesting, VCR shares convert into ordinary shares 

with disposal restrictions. The terms and conditions of these shares are further described at Note 27. 

•  The  value  of  the  benefit  received  by  an  employee  from  issue  of  the  VCR  shares  is  assessed  as  the  difference 
between  the  value  of  the  VCR  shares  at  the  date  of  issue  and  the  present  value  of  the  amount  payable  by  the 
employee  for  purchase  of  the  VCR  shares.  In  accordance  with  AASB  2  Share-based  Payment,  the  benefit  is 
expensed  on  a  proportional  basis  over  the  period  from  issue  date  to  the  date  on  which  the  employee  becomes 
unconditionally entitled to the full benefit of ownership of the shares. 

In  2015  the  Equity  Incentive  Plan  (“EIP”)  has  been  introduced  to  replace  the  EOP  without  prejudice  to  the  rights  of 
current participants in the EOP. Refer to Note 27 for more details.  

(p) 

Borrowing costs 

Borrowing costs can include interest expense, finance charges in respect of finance leases, amortisation of discounts or 
premiums, ancillary costs relating to borrowings, and exchange differences arising from foreign currency borrowings to 
the extent that they are regarded as an adjustment to interest costs.  

Borrowing costs are expensed in the period which they are incurred, except for borrowing costs incurred as part of the 
cost of the construction of a qualifying asset which are capitalised until the asset is ready for its intended use or sale. 

(q) 

Financial instruments  

Classification 

The Group has financial instruments in the following category: loans and receivables. The classification depends on the 
purpose for which the instruments were acquired. Management determines the classification of its financial instruments 
at initial recognition. 

Non-derivative financial instruments 

Non-derivative  financial  instruments  consist  of  investments  in  equity  and  debt  securities,  trade  and  other  receivables, 
cash and cash equivalents, loans and borrowings, and trade and other payables. 

Non-derivative  financial  instruments  are  initially  recognised  at  fair  value,  plus  directly  attributable  transaction  costs  (if 
any), except for instruments recorded at fair value through profit or loss. After initial recognition, non-derivative financial 
instruments are measured as described below.  

Loans and receivables 

Loans and receivables are non-interest bearing, non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that 
are  not  quoted  in  an  active  market.  The  loans  are  initially  recognised  based  on  fair  value  plus  directly  attributable 
transactions costs and are subsequently stated at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method.  

Impairment of financial assets 

Financial assets are tested for impairment at each financial year end to establish whether there is any objective evidence 
of impairment.  

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 58 

79

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 1:  Statement of Significant Accounting Policies (continued) 
(q) 

Financial instruments (continued) 

For loans and receivables or held-to-maturity investments carried at amortised cost, impairment loss is measured as the 
difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows (excluding future 
credit losses that have not been incurred) discounted at the financial asset’s original effective interest rate. The amount 

of the loss reduces the carrying amount of the asset and is recognised in profit or loss. The impairment loss is reversed 
through profit or loss if the amount of the impairment loss decreases in a subsequent period and the decrease can be 
related objectively to an event occurring after the impairment was recognised.  

Financial liabilities 

Financial  liabilities  include  trade  payables,  other  creditors  and  loans  from  third  parties  including  loans  from  or  other 
amounts due to director-related entities.  

Non-derivative financial liabilities are recognised at amortised cost, comprising original debt less principal payments and 
amortisation. 

Non-interest bearing financial liabilities for deferred cash consideration on the acquisition of acquired firms is measured 
at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. The implied interest expense is recognised in profit and loss. 

Derivative financial instruments 

The Group designates certain derivatives as either: 

•  hedges of fair value of recognised assets or liabilities or a firm commitment (fair value hedge); or 

•  hedges of highly probable forecast transactions (cash flow hedges). 

The  Group  currently  has  cash  flow  hedges  only,  relating  to  interest  rate  risk  management.  At  the  inception  of  the 
transaction  the  relationship  between  hedging  instruments and  hedged  items,  as  well  as  the  Group’s  risk  management 
objective and  strategy for undertaking  various hedge  transactions  are  documented. It is  the  Group’s  policy  to  hedge a 
portion of its exposure in order to minimise the impact of an adverse change in interest rates that the Group is subject to. 

Assessments,  both  at  hedge  inception  and  on  an  ongoing  basis,  of  whether  the  derivatives  that  are  used  in  hedging 
transactions have been and will continue to be highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flow hedged 
items, are also documented. 

Fair value hedge 

Changes  in  the  fair  value  of  derivatives  that  are  designated  and  qualify  as  fair  value  hedges  are  recorded  in  the 
consolidated  statement  of  comprehensive  income,  together  with  any  changes  in  the  fair  value  of  hedged  assets  or 
liabilities that are attributable to the hedged risk. 

Cash flow hedge 

The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges is 
recognised in a hedge reserve in equity. The gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in 
the consolidated statement of comprehensive income. 

Amounts  accumulated  in  the  hedge  reserve  in  equity  are  transferred  to  the  consolidated  statement  of  comprehensive 
income in the periods when the hedged item will affect profit and loss. 

(r) 

Segment reporting 

Determination and presentation of operating segments 

The  Group  determines  and  presents  operating  segments  based  on  the  information  that  is  internally  provided  to  the 
Group Managing Director, who is the Group’s chief operating decision maker. 

An operating segment is a component of the Group that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues 
and incur expenses, including revenues and expenses that relate to transactions with any of the Group’s other 

80

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 59 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 1:  Statement of Significant Accounting Policies (continued) 
(s) 

Foreign currency translations and balances  

components. All operating segment results are regularly reviewed by the Group’s Managing Director to make decisions 
about  resources  to  be  allocated  to  the  segment  and  to  assess  its  performance.  Refer  to  Note  3  for  details  on  how 
management determines the operating segments.  

Segment  results  that  are  reported  to  the  Group  Managing Director include items  directly  attributable  to  a  segment,  as 
well as those that can be allocated on a reasonable basis. 

Functional and presentation currency 

The  financial  statements  of  each  entity  within  the  consolidated  entity  are  measured  using  the  currency  of  the  primary 
economic environment in which that entity operates (the functional currency). The consolidated financial statements are 
presented in Australian dollars which is the consolidated entity’s functional and presentation currency.  

Transactions and balances 

Transactions in foreign currencies of entities within the consolidated group are translated into functional currency at the 
rate of exchange ruling at the date of the transaction except for the foreign operations disclosed below. 

Foreign  currency  monetary  items  that  are  outstanding  at  the  reporting  date  (other  than  monetary  items  arising  under 
foreign currency contracts where the exchange rate for that monetary item is fixed in the contract) are translated using 
the spot rate at the end of the financial year. 

Except for certain foreign currency hedges, all resulting exchange differences arising on settlement or re-statement are 
recognised as revenues and expenses for the financial year.  

Foreign operations 

Entities that have a functional currency different to the presentation currency are translated as follows: 

•  assets and liabilities are translated at the closing rate on reporting date; 

• 

income and expenses are translated at actual exchange rates or average exchange rates for the period, unless the 
exchange  rate  fluctuated  significantly  during  the  period,  in  which  case  the  exchange  rates  at  the  dates  of  the 
transactions are used; and 

•  all resulting exchange differences are recognised in other comprehensive income, a separate component of equity. 

Goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of a foreign operation are treated as assets and liabilities of 
the foreign operation and translated at the closing rate.  

(t) 

Earnings per share 

Basic earnings per share (“EPS”) is calculated as net profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the Company divided 
by the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the year. 

Diluted  EPS  is  calculated  as net  profit  attributable  to  ordinary  equity  holders  of  the  Company  divided  by  the  weighted 
average number of ordinary shares and dilutive potential ordinary shares outstanding during the year. 

(u) 

Comparatives  

Where  necessary,  comparative  information  has  been  reclassified  and  repositioned  for  consistency  with  current  year 
disclosures.  

Comparatives have also been updated for changes in accounting policies as described in Note 1(w) below. 

(v) 

Rounding of amounts  

The parent entity and the consolidated entity have applied the relief available under ASIC Class Order CO 98/0100 and 
accordingly,  amounts  in  the  consolidated  financial  statements  and  Directors’  Report  have  been  rounded  off  to  the 
nearest thousand dollars, or in certain cases, to the nearest dollar.  

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 60 

81

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 1:  Statement of Significant Accounting Policies (continued) 
(w)  Changes in accounting policies adopted by the Group 

Change to accounting for business combinations  

The Group has reassessed its accounting treatment of deferred consideration payable in the context of its acquisition of 
legal service practices. This reassessment has taken into account an analysis of historical acquisitions in Australia and 
the United Kingdom where cash and share-based consideration payable to the vendor principals of businesses acquired 
by the Group is deferred. 

Historically, all cash payments and share issues to vendors, whether restrained, deferred, contingent or otherwise, have 
been treated as consideration for the relevant business acquisition. 

The  Group  has  now  carefully  considered  the  appropriate  treatment  of  these  payments  in  light  of  the  evolving 
interpretation  of  AASB  3  Business  Combinations  with  regard  to  the  treatment  of  specific  components  of  deferred 
consideration. 

An assessment has been made in relation to those arrangements that include contingent consideration to vendors of the 
business that are subject to so-called “bad leaver” provisions.   

Included in the terms of a number of purchase agreements entered into by the Group is an arrangement whereby the 
payment of cash consideration to and/or the retention of share-based consideration by the vendors of acquired entities is 
contingent upon the relevant vendors remaining with the Group for a defined period.  If a vendor ceases to remain with 
the Group for the prescribed period, the vendor may forfeit its entitlement to payment of the cash consideration and/or its 
ability to retain its share-based consideration, at the discretion of the Group. 

In  light  of  the  evolving  interpretation  of  AASB  3  within  the  accounting  profession,  we  now  take  the  view  that  such 
arrangements will be deemed to be “separate transactions” for accounting purposes, the effect of which is that they are 
treated  as  payments  to  former  owners,  to  be  expensed  in  accordance  with  other  applicable  Australian  Accounting 
Standards. 

The effect of these changes to the financial statements for the year ended 30 June 2014 is outlined as follows:  

Impact on consolidated comprehensive income of 
the restatement of business acquisition accounting 

(Previously reported) 
$’000 

Restatements $’000 

30/06/2014              

30/06/2014   
(Restated)            
$’000 

Gain from bargain purchase 

Payments to former owners 

Share based payment expense to former owners 

-   

               19,762  

             19,762  

- 

- 

           (3,651) 

          (3,651) 

               (5,379) 

             (5,379) 

Finance cost – decrease 

Income tax expense – increase 

                         (8,412) 

566  

             (7,846) 

(23,344)                             

                    (4,167)  

          (27,511) 

Profit for the year – increase 

61,105 

7,131                

68,236  

Profit for the year attributable to: 

Owners of the Company – increase 

Non-controlling interests – increase 

Increase in other comprehensive income, net of tax 

Increase in other comprehensive income for the year 
attributable to: 

Owners of the Company 

Non-controlling interests 

60,946                                

               7,074  

             68,020  

159 

5,387 

57                          

                   216  

139 

5,526 

66,326 

7,213 

 166 

                     57 

73,539 

223 

33.80  

33.20  

Page 61 

Effect on basic earnings per share (cents)  

30.30  

                     3.50  

Effect on diluted earnings per share (cents)  

29.80  

3.40  

82

Slater and Gordon Limited 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
                                         
                                       
  
  
  
  
                             
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                
                                
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 1:  Statement of Significant Accounting Policies (continued) 
(w)  Changes in accounting policies adopted by the Group (continued) 

Impact on assets, liabilities and equity as at                       
30 June 2014 

(Previously reported) 
$’000 

Restatements $’000 

30/06/2014              

Work in progress - decrease 

Intangible assets - decrease 

Deferred tax assets - decrease 

Payables – decrease 

Current tax liability – increase 

Current provisions – increase 

Deferred tax liability – decrease 

Share capital – decrease 

Reserves – increase 
Retained profits – increase 
Non-controlling interest - increase 

473,339 

130,190 

26,985 

               (6,005)* 

               (6,535)* 

(4,721) 

214,037 

             (16,125) 

1,960 

16,468 

124,604 

                   521 

                  3,656  

(983) 

233,638 

             (16,589) 

9,090 

180,139 

214 

5,127  

               7,074  

57 

30/06/2014             
(Restated)            
$’000 

467,334** 

123,655 

22,264 

197,912 

2,481 

20,124 

123,621 

217,049 

14,217 

187,213 

271 

*Includes the impact of the finalisation of acquisition accounting for Pannone of $6,005,000 decrease in WIP and $1,110,000 increase in 
intangible assets.  
**Additional restatements to reclassify the WIP balance between current and non-current are discussed below.  

Classification of Work In Progress and Disbursements 

Historically, all of the Group’s work in progress and disbursement balances have been classified as current assets in the 
consolidated statement of financial position, with the exception of the work in progress of the Group’s Project Litigation 
practice which included a current and non-current component. The work in progress on the Group’s Personal Injury Law 
(“PIL”) matters were historically assessed as being capable of being resolved at any stage of the matters process and 
therefore  all  work  in  progress  and disbursements  on  PIL matters  were  classified  as  current  assets in  the consolidated 
statement of financial position. 

The  Group  has  reassessed  the  classification  of  its  work  in  progress  and  disbursement  balances  in  the  consolidated 
statement of financial position as at 30 June 2015.  A historical analysis of the Group’s work in progress balances and 
historical  file  velocity  rates  were  used  to  form  a  view  on  the  expected  timing  of  settlements.  The  Group  carefully 
considered the appropriate accounting as to this analysis and the applicable Australian Accounting Standards.  

As  a  result  of  this  reassessment,  the  Group  has  made  adjustments  to  the  presentation  of  its  work  in  progress  and 
disbursement  balances  to  include  a  current  and  non-current  classification  in  the  consolidated  statement  of  financial 
position  as  at  30  June  2015.  The  Group  has  also  reclassified  comparative  balances  in  the  consolidated  statement  of 
financial  position  as  at  30  June  2014  to  assist  users  in  reviewing  trends  across  the  two  reporting  periods.  It  is  not 
practicable to restate earlier periods. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 62 

83

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 1:  Statement of Significant Accounting Policies (continued) 
(w)  Changes in accounting policies adopted by the Group (continued) 

The effect of these changes to the financial statements for the year ended 30 June 2014 is outlined as follows:  

Impact on Work in Progress balance as at          
30 June 2014 

(Previously reported) 
$’000 

Restatements $’000 

30/06/2014              

30/06/2014             
(Restated)            
$’000 

Current assets 
Non-personal injury 
Personal injury 
Project litigation 

Non-current assets 
Non-personal injury 
Personal injury 
Project litigation 

16,412 
453,091 
1,106 
470,609 

- 
- 
2,730 
2,730 

(1,681) 
(190,856) 
- 
(192,537) 

- 
186,532 
- 
186,532 

14,731 
262,235 
1,106 
278,072 

- 
186,532 
2,730 
189,262 

Impact on Disbursement balance as at                    
30 June 2014 

(Previously reported) 
$’000 

Restatements $’000 

30/06/2014              

30/06/2014             
(Restated)            
$’000 

Current assets 
Disbursements 
Allowance for non-recovery 

Non-current assets 
Disbursements 
Allowance for non-recovery 

133,927 
(7,717) 
126,210 

- 
- 
- 

(51,857) 
6,173 
(45,684) 

51,857 
(6,173) 
45,684 

82,070 
(1,544) 
80,526 

51,857 
(6,173) 
45,684 

(x) 

Adoption of new and amended accounting standards 

The  Group  has  adopted  all  the  new  mandatory  standards  and  interpretations  for  the  current  reporting  period.  The 
adoption of these standards and interpretations did not result in a material change on the reported results and position of 
the Group, other than as identified in Note 1(w), as they did not result in any changes to the Group’s existing accounting 
policies. 

(y) 

Accounting standards issued but not yet effective at 30 June 2015 

AASB 15 Revenue from contracts with customers 

AASB  15  is  operative  for  annual  reporting  periods  beginning  on  or  after  1  January  2017.  AASB  15  specifies  the 
accounting  for  an  individual  contract  with  a  customer,  also  recognising  that  the  requirements  of  the  standard  may  be 
applied to a portfolio of contracts for performance obligations with similar characteristics, if the entity reasonably expects 
that  the  effects  on  the  financial  statements  of  applying  the  standard  to  the  portfolio  would  not  differ  materially  from 
applying this standard to the individual contracts (or performance obligations) within that portfolio. 

AASB  15  introduces  a  five  step  process  for  revenue  recognition  with  the  core  principle  being  for  entities  to  recognise 
revenue  to  depict  the  transfer  of  goods  or  services  to  customers  in  amounts  that  reflect  the  consideration  (that  is, 
payment) to which the entity expects to be entitled in exchange for those goods or services. The five step approach is as 
follows: 

•  Step 1: Identify the contracts with the customer; 

•  Step 2: Identify the separate performance obligations; 

•  Step 3: Determine the transaction price; 

84

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 63 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 1:  Statement of Significant Accounting Policies (continued) 
(y) 

Accounting standards issued but not yet effective at 30 June 2015 (continued) 

•  Step 4: Allocate the transaction price; and 

•  Step 5: Recognise revenue when a performance obligation is satisfied.  

AASB 15 will also result in enhanced disclosures in relation to revenue, provide guidance for transactions that were not 
previously addressed comprehensively (for example, service revenue and contract modifications) and improve guidance 
for multiple-element arrangements. 

The Group currently determines the stage of completion based on a methodology which identifies services performed to 
date as a percentage of total services to be performed for an outcome to be rendered in the case. 

A  thorough  reassessment of the  valuation methodology  within all  practice  areas  in  each region  is being undertaken to 
determine the full impact of the standard.  The evaluation is in progress at the time of reporting and will be completed to 
facilitate the Group’s intended early adoption of AASB 15 in the financial year ending 30 June 2016. 

AASB 9 Financial instruments 

Significant  revisions  to  the  classification  and  measurement  of  financial  assets,  reducing  the  number  of  categories  and 
simplifying the measurement choices, including the removal of impairment testing of assets measured at fair value. The 
amortised cost model is available for debt assets meeting both business model and cash flow characteristics tests. All 
investments in equity instruments using AASB 9 are to be measured at fair value.  

Chapter  6  Hedge  Accounting  supersedes  the  general  hedge  accounting  requirements  in  AASB  139  Financial 
Instruments:  Recognition  and  Measurement,  which  many  consider  to  be  too  rules-based  and  arbitrary.  Chapter  6 
requirements include a new approach to hedge accounting that is intended to more closely align hedge accounting with 
risk  management  activities  undertaken  by  entities  when  hedging  financial  and  non-financial  risks.  Some  of  the  key 
changes from AASB 139 are as follows:  

• 

to  allow  hedge  accounting  of risk  components of non-financial  items  that  are  identifiable  and  measurable  (many  of 
which were prohibited from being designated as hedged items under AASB 139);  

•  changes  in  the  accounting  for  the  time  value  of  options,  the  forward  element  of  a  forward  contract  and  foreign-

currency basis spreads designated as hedging instruments; and  

•  modification of the requirements for effectiveness testing (including removal of the ‘brightline’ effectiveness test that 

offset for hedging must be in the range 80%-125%).  

Revised  disclosures  about  an  entity’s  hedge  accounting  have  also  been  added  to  AASB  7  Financial  Instruments: 
Disclosures. 

Impairment of assets is now based on expected losses in AASB 9 which requires entities to measure:  

• 

• 

the  12-month  expected  credit  losses  (expected  credit  losses  that  result  from  those  default  events  on  the  financial 
instrument that are possible within 12 months after the reporting date); or  

full lifetime expected credit losses (expected credit losses that result from all possible default events over the life of 
the financial instrument. 

The effective date is annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2018. 

AASB 9 is expected to be applied when it becomes effective. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 64 

85

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 2:  Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgements  
In  preparing  these consolidated  financial statements,  management  has made judgements,  estimates  and  assumptions 
that affect the application of the Group’s accounting policies and the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and 
expenses. Actual results may differ from these estimates. 

Estimates  and  underlying  assumptions  are  reviewed  on  an  ongoing  basis.  Revisions  to  estimates  are  recognised 
prospectively. The areas involving significant estimates or judgements are: 

(a) 

Impairment of goodwill  

Goodwill  is  allocated  to  cash  generating  units  (“CGU’s”)  according  to  applicable  business  operations.  CGUs  for  the 
purposes of impairment testing are: 

1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 

Australia – Personal Injury Law  (“AUS – PIL”) 
Australia – General Law (“AUS – GL”)  
UK – Personal Injury Law (“UK – PIL”) 
UK – General Law (“UK – GL”) 
Slater Gordon Solutions (“SGS”) 

During the current financial year the Group acquired several new entities within Australia and the UK, as a result of the 
significant  geographical  expansion  of  the  Group  and  expansion  of  business  activities;  additional  CGUs  have  been 
identified and the Group now allocates the UK subsidiaries into two CGUs being UK - PIL and UK - GL.  SGS has been 
identified as its own CGU due to the different revenue streams and independent cash flows. 

Determining whether goodwill is impaired requires an estimation of the value in use of the cash generating units to which 
goodwill  has  been  allocated.  The  value  in  use  calculation  requires  management  to  estimate  the  future  cash  flows 
expected to arise from the cash-generating unit and a suitable discount rate in order to calculate present value. Where 
the actual future cash flows are less than expected, a material impairment loss may arise. Refer to Note 13. 

(b)  Work in progress (“WIP”) 

WIP  is  the  balance of cases not  yet billed  at  the end  of  the  reporting  period.  The  Group  measures WIP  based  on  the 
estimated fees likely to be rendered to the client multiplied by the percentage stage of completion at the reporting date 
adjusted for the probability of success. To determine the probability of success of a case the Group takes into account 
past  history  of  similar  cases  and  a  level  of  judgement  is  required  based  on  experience  and  historical  performance  of 
similar matters. Refer to Note 10. 

The stage of completion valuation methodology incorporates best estimates of expected revenue and the percentage of 
total services completed to date. The expected revenue is based on the expected fee for the nature of the legal service 
provided with reference to internal and external (where available) historical and forecast fee levels. The percentage of 
completion and probability of success is made with reference to internal and external (where available) information and 
experience, and having regard to where a file is in its life cycle. 

The Group conducts detailed reviews of all case files on a half-yearly basis and revises calculations based on estimates 
of  revenue  and  stage  of  completion  as  necessary.  While  the  Group  remains  satisfied  that  the  valuation  methodology 
applied to work in progress is robust and supported by historical trends, it acknowledges that the actual amount billed 
may  vary  from  the  estimated  amounts  previously  recognised.  However,  the  Group  does  not  anticipate  any  material 
variation in the amounts recognised.    

In addition, when new businesses are acquired, there is a transition period during which time the Group’s practices and 
procedures are embedded into the operations of the new business. Therefore the valuation of work in progress acquired 
in a business combination may be adjusted during the period of provisional accounting for the acquisition.  

(c) 

Provisional accounting 

Provisional  accounting  is  applied  by  the  Group  to  account  for  business  combinations  when  the  initial  accounting  is 
incomplete  at  the  end  of  the  reporting  period.  By  its  nature provisional  accounting  involves  estimates  and  judgements 
based on the information available to the Group at the end of the reporting period, while it continues to seek information 
about facts and circumstances that existed as of the acquisition date.  

(d) 

Income tax 

Deferred  tax  assets  and  liabilities  are  based  on  the  assumption  that  no  adverse  change  will  occur  in  the  income  tax 
legislation  both  in  Australian  and  the  UK  and  the  anticipation  that  the  Group  will  derive  sufficient  future  assessable 
income to enable the benefit to be realised and comply with the conditions of deductibility imposed by the law.  

86

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 65 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 2:  Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgements (continued) 

(d)  

Income tax (continued) 

Deferred  tax  assets  are  recognised  for  deductible  temporary  differences  as  management  considers  that  it  is  probable 
that future taxable profits will be available to utilise those temporary differences. Refer to Note 6. 

(e) 

Fair value measurements 

A number of the Group’s accounting policies and disclosures require the measurement of fair values, for both financial 
and non-financial assets and liabilities. 

When measuring the fair value of an asset or a liability, the Group uses observable market data as far as possible. Fair 
values are categorised into different levels in a fair value hierarchy based on the inputs used in the valuation techniques 
as follows: 

•  Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that the entity can access at the 

measurement date; 

•  Level 2: inputs, other than quoted prices included within Level 1, that are observable for the asset or liability, either 

directly or indirectly; and 

•  Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data. 

If the inputs used to measure the fair value of an asset or a liability fall into different levels of the fair value hierarchy, then 
the fair value measurement is categorised in its entirety in the same level of the fair value hierarchy as the lowest level 
input that is significant to the entire measurement. 

Further information about the assumptions made in measuring fair values is included in the following Notes: 

•  Note 27 – Share-based payment arrangements 

•  Note 31 – Business combinations 

•  Note 32 – Financial risk management 

•  Note 33 – Fair value measurements 

(f) 

Determination and fair value of intangibles in a business combination 

The fair value of customer relationships acquired in a business combination is determined using the multi-period excess 
earnings method (“MEEM”)  whilst the fair value of trademarks acquired in a business combination is based on a relief 
from royalties approach. These methods require estimates by management of future income streams, applicable royalty 
rates and discount rates. Refer to Note 31. 

(g) 

Principal vs agent 

SGS Motor Services provides car hire and repair services for not at fault clients, and the Group acts as a principal: 

•  Although the services are provided by third party suppliers, the Group has the primary responsibility to ensure that 

the services have been delivered to the clients.  

•  The Group cannot vary the prices set by the supplier, as it is governed by an industry framework. 

•  The Group collects the revenue from the customer and bears all credit risk. 

Revenue resulting from car hire and repair services within SGS Motor Services is recognised on a gross basis. 

(h) 

Provision for solicitor liability 

Provision  for  Solicitor  Liability  claims  relates  to  open  claims  and  potential  future  claims  as  identified  at  end  of  the 
reporting period. Estimates of the provision is determined based on historical data, taking into account the nature of the 
existing  claim  and  expected  reimbursed  expense  will  be  included.  The  provision  determined  includes  the  estimated 
maximum amount payable by the Group. Refer to Note 18. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 66 

87

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 3:  Segment Reporting 
The  Group  has  three  operating  segments,  as  described  below,  which  are  the  Group’s  strategic  business  units.  Each 
strategic  business  unit  is  managed  separately.  For  each  of  the  strategic  business  units,  the  Group  Managing  Director 
reviews  internal  management  reports  on  a  monthly  basis.  The  following  summary  describes  each  of  the  Group’s 
reportable segments: 

•  Slater and Gordon Australia (“AUS”) – includes the parent company Slater and Gordon Limited and its subsidiaries 
in Australia. This segment conducts a range of legal services within the geographical area of Australia. This segment 
also  includes  investments  in  the  Group’s  other  segments,  and  borrowings  and  capital  raising  activities  to  finance 
investment and operations of the combined Group. There is a recharge of ongoing management support to the other 
segments in the Group. 

•  Slater and Gordon UK (“UK”) – includes the Group’s operations, conducting a range of legal services in the United 

Kingdom. The segment also includes the investment in SGS. 

•  Slater  Gordon  Solutions  (“SGS”)  –  represents  the  newly  acquired  business  assets/entities  from  Quindell  Plc, 
offering  legal  services  relating  to  road  traffic  accidents,  employee  liability  and  noise  induced  hearing  loss.  This 
segment also provides complementary services in health and motor services. 

Segment assets are allocated to countries based on where the assets are located. 

2015 

Total segment revenue 
Inter-segment revenue 
Revenue from external customers 

Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and 
amortisation 

Interest revenue 
Interest expense 
Depreciation and amortisation 
Income tax (expense) / benefit 
Net profit/(loss) after income tax 

Segment assets 

Total segment assets* 
Inter-segment assets 
Total assets per the balance sheet 

Segment liabilities 

Total segment liabilities 
Inter-segment liabilities 
Total liabilities per the balance sheet 

*Additions to non-current assets 

AUS 
$’000 
321,632 
(7,349) 
314,283 

73,996 
2,997 
(6,355) 
(5,712) 
(19,239) 
45,687 

760,669 
(118,305) 
642,364 

340,922 
- 
340,922 

UK 
$’000 
275,845 
- 
275,845 

63,797 
272 
(4,851) 
(4,024) 
(12,452) 
42,742 

1,666,549 
(27,055) 
1,639,494 

992,153 
(118,305) 
873,848 

12,042 
Property, plant and equipment 
1,009,698 
Intangibles, including goodwill 
1,021,740 
Total additions to non-current assets 
**Net loss after tax represents the period from 29 May 2015 (date of acquisition) to 30 June 2015. 

7,837 
5,152 
12,989 

SGS 
$’000 

37,181 
- 
37,181 

(5,376) 
- 
(4) 
(209) 
963 
(4,626)** 

Total 
$’000 
634,658 
(7,349) 
627,309 

132,417 
3,269 
(11,210) 
(9,945) 
(30,728) 
83,803 

775,163 
- 
775,163 

3,202,381 
(145,360) 
3,057,021 

434,313 
(27,055) 
407,258 

1,767,388 
(145,360) 
1,622,028 

5,086 
71,355 
76,441 

24,965 
1,086,205 
1,111,170 

88

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 67 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 3:  Segment Reporting (continued) 

2014                                                        
Restated   
Total segment revenue 
Inter-segment revenue 
Revenue from external customers 

Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation 
and amortisation 
Interest revenue 
Interest expense 
Depreciation and amortisation 
Income tax expense 
Net profit after income tax 

Segment assets 
Total segment assets* 
Inter-segment assets 
Total assets per the balance sheet 

Segment liabilities 
Total segment liabilities 
Inter-segment liabilities 
Total liabilities per the balance sheet 

*Additions to non-current assets 
Property, plant and equipment 
Intangibles, including goodwill 

Total additions to non-current assets 

AUS 
$’000 

241,256 
(5,467) 
235,789 

56,683 
1,584 
(5,142) 
(3,450) 
(16,253) 
33,422 

614,766 
(114,240) 
500,526 

UK 
$’000 

202,439 
- 
202,439 

52,036 
245 
(2,704) 
(3,505) 
(11,258) 
34,814 

404,576 
- 
404,576 

235,961 
- 
235,961 

364,631 
(114,240) 
250,391 

949 
2,558 

3,507 

4,238 
11,687 

15,925 

SGS 
$’000 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 

Total 
$’000 
443,695 
(5,467) 
438,228 

108,719 
1,829 
(7,846) 
(6,955) 
(27,511) 
68,236 

1,019,342 
(114,240) 
905,102 

600,592 
(114,240) 
486,352 

5,187 
14,245 

19,432 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 68 

89

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 4:  Revenue 

Services Revenue 
Ancillary revenue 
Commission revenue 
Rendering of services – non-legal 

Gain from bargain purchase 

Other income 
Interest 
Other 

(a) 

Interest from 

Other persons 

VCR share loans to employees 

Note 5:  Profit from Continuing Activities 

Finance costs expense 
Interest on bank overdraft and loans 
Interest on deferred consideration payable to vendor on acquisitions 
Interest on obligations under hire purchases 
Deferred costs of borrowing 

Depreciation and amortisation of non-current assets 
Property, plant and equipment 
Software development 
Trademarks 
Customer relationships 

Cost of sales 
Ancillary revenue  
Commission revenue  
Rendering of services – non-legal  

Share based payments expense 

Share based payment expense to former owners 

Post-employment benefits 

Note 

2015 
$’000 

     2014 
$’000 
Restated 

15,252 
1,100 
4,120 
20,472 

- 
- 
- 
- 

58,939 

19,762 

4(a) 

3,269 
4,963 
8,232 

2,294 

975 
3,269 

8,551 
1,942 
500 
217 
          11,210 

4,442 
1,807 
3,696 
- 
9,945 

14,490 
3 
2,169 
16,662 

2,031 

11,506 

11,839 

1,829 
4,824 
6,653 

401 

1,428 
1,829 

4,807 
2,502 
537 
- 
7,846 

4,352 
1,141 
1,404 
58 
6,955 

- 
- 
- 
- 

1,180 

5,379 

9,237 

90

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 69 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 6:  Income Tax  

Income tax expense 
Current tax 
Deferred tax 
Adjustment for current tax relating to prior periods 

Income tax recognised in other comprehensive income 
Deferred tax credit arising on cash flow hedges 
Deferred tax charge arising on foreign exchange gain 

Income tax recognised directly in equity 
Current tax credit on share issue costs 

Deferred income tax expense included in income tax expense 
(Increase)/decrease in deferred tax assets 
Deferred income tax relating to items charged to other comprehensive income 
Deferred income tax relating to items charged directly to equity 
Increase in deferred tax liabilities 
Recoup prior year tax losses and over/under on prior year losses 
Net deferred taxes arising from business combinations 
Exchange differences 

The prima facie tax payable on profit before tax differs from the income tax 
expense as follows: 
At the Australian statutory income tax rate of 30% (2014: 30%) 
Tax effect of amounts which are not deductible/(assessable) in calculating 
taxable income: 
Non-deductible expenses 
Non-assessable income 

Adjustments in respect to prior periods 
Difference in overseas tax rate 
Deferred tax assets not recognised 
Deferred tax assets now recognised 

Other 

Income tax expense 

Current tax assets 
Balance acquired per SGS acquisition 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 
Restated 

12,901 
18,898 
(1,071) 
30,728 

(150) 
5,190 
5,040 

(7) 
(7) 

(61,092) 
(5,040) 
7 
56,887 
(995) 
29,835 
(704) 
18,898 

6,811 
21,033 
(333) 
27,511 

(48) 
2,085 
2,037 

- 
- 

2,444 
(2,037) 
- 
20,897 
- 
110 
(381) 
21,033 

114,531 
34,359 

95,747 
28,724 

12,083 
(16,139) 
30,303 
(1,071) 
(3,204) 
4,273 
(54) 

481 

30,728 

29,041 
29,041 

3,252 
(996) 
30,980 
(48) 
(3,046) 
120 
(110) 
(385) 

27,511 

- 
- 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 70 

91

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 6:  Income Tax (continued) 

Current tax liability 
Balance at the beginning of the year 
Balances arising from business acquisitions 
Current income tax expense 
Foreign withholding tax credit 
Tax paid 
Adjustments in respect of prior periods 
Other 
Exchange differences 
Balance at the end of the year 

Unrecognised deferred tax assets 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 
Restated 

(2,481) 
(13,736) 
(12,901) 
- 
6,049 
620 
- 
(107) 
(22,556) 

(3,940) 
- 
(6,811) 
282 
8,006 
179 
(32) 
(165) 

(2,481) 

Deferred  tax  assets  have  not been  recognised  in  respect  of  the  following  items,  because  it  is  not  probable  that  future 
taxable profit will be available against which the Group can use the benefits therefrom. 

Deductible temporary differences 

Tax losses 

5,062 

130 

809 

110 

919 
In  2015  costs  were  incurred  for  both  Trademarks  and  Acquisition  Costs  relating  to  acquisition  of  subsidiaries.  These 
amounts total $16,873,000 (tax effect: $5,062,000) and have not been recognised as a deferred tax asset.  These costs 
form part of the cost base of the Group’s subsidiaries and as the Group does not plan to dispose of its subsidiaries in the 
foreseeable future, no deferred tax has been recognised for these costs. 

5,192 

A capital loss representing the movement in foreign exchange of $368,000 (tax effect: $110,000) arose on the transfer of 
shares held by Slater and Gordon in one of its subsidiary entities. It is uncertain whether future capital gains will arise 
against which this loss can be offset. 

Revenue losses of $66,000 (tax effect: $20,000) relating to one of the Group’s subsidiaries has not been recognised due 
to the uncertainty of that entity having sufficient future profits available to utilise the loss. 

Deferred tax assets 

Provision for impairment 

Employee benefits 

Provision for legal costs 

Accruals  

Non-deducted business related costs 

Fair value of cash flow hedges  

Unbilled acquired WIP and disbursements 

Unrendered WIP and disbursements not yet deducted 

Property, plant and equipment 

Other 

Revenue losses carried forward 

Advanced Company Income Tax (“ACIT”) refund in Malta 

Deductible goodwill 

92

Slater and Gordon Limited 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 
Restated 

8,808 

6,602 

378 

3,122 

251 

378 

14,010 

4,967 

516 

2,007 

23,138 

12,490 

6,689 

83,356 

1,276 

5,755 

275 

2,609 

451 

228 

985 

- 

171 

173 

3,329 

- 

7,012 

22,264 

Page 71 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 6:  Income Tax (continued) 

Deferred tax liabilities 
Prepayments 

Work in progress 

Unrendered disbursements 

Intangibles  

Foreign currency translation reserve 

Other 

Note 7:  Dividends 

Dividends paid during the year 

Dividends on ordinary shares 
Partially franked (40%) interim dividend at the tax rate of 30% for 2015: 3.50 cents 
per share (2014: 3.00 cents per share, fully franked) 
Fully franked final dividend at the tax rate of 30% for 2014: 5.00 cents per share 
(2013: 3.85 cents per share, fully franked) 
Total dividends paid during the year 

Dividends proposed and not recognised as a liability 

2015 
$’000 

(917) 

  (142,830) 

(15,337) 

(13,946) 

(7,276) 

(202) 
(180,508) 

2014 
$’000  
Restated 

(810) 

(105,590) 

(14,184) 

(913) 

(2,085) 

(39) 
(123,621) 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 

7,341 

10,279 
17,620 

6,115 

7,655 
13,770 

Dividends on ordinary shares 
Partially franked (40%) final dividend at the tax rate of 30% for the year ended   
30 June 2015: 5.50 cents per share (2014: 5.00 cents per share, fully franked) 

19,290 

10,217 

Franking credit balance 
Balance of franking account at year end adjusted for franking credits arising from 
payment  of  provision  for  income  tax  and  after  deducting  franking  credits  to  be 
used in payment of proposed dividends: 

Impact on  franking  account of  dividend  recommended by  the  directors since  the 
year end but not recognised as a liability at year end: 

891 

(3,082) 

3,307 

4,379 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 72 

93

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 8:  Cash and Cash Equivalents 

Cash at bank 

Note 9:  Receivables 

Current 

Trade debtors 

Impairment of trade debtors 

Disbursements 
Allowance for non-recovery 

Other receivables 

Non-current 

Disbursements 
Allowance for non-recovery 

Impairment of receivable 
Balance at beginning of the year 
Receivables written off as uncollectible 
Provision for impairment recognised, including balances from business 
acquisitions 
Foreign exchange translation differences 

Balance at end of the year 

Note 10:  Work in Progress 

Current 

Non-personal injury 
Personal injury 
Project litigation 

Non-current 
Personal injury 
Project litigation 

Note 11:  Other Assets 

Current 

Prepayments 

Other current assets 

94

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Note 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 

23(a) 

96,985 

25,270 

2015 
$’000 

373,061 

(76,115) 
296,946 

 361,590  
(44,769) 
316,821 

6,088 
619,855 

2014 
$’000 
Restated 
111,549 
(8,690) 
102,859 

82,070 
(1,544) 
80,526 

299 
183,684 

 96,358  
(16,596) 

 79,762  

51,857 

(6,173) 
45,684 

(8,690) 
2,980 

(68,005) 
(2,400) 
(76,115) 

2015 
$’000 

16,065 
533,793 
3,319 
553,177 

270,578 
2,143 
272,721 

2015 
$’000 

21,943 

8,079 
30,022 

(5,951) 
1,440 

(3,991) 
(188) 

(8,690) 

2014 
$’000 

14,731 
262,235 
1,106 
278,072 

186,532 
2,730 
189,262 

2014 
$’000 
10,337 
2,066 
12,403 

Page 73 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 12:  Property, Plant and Equipment 

Plant and equipment at cost 

Less accumulated depreciation 

Land and buildings at cost 

Less accumulated depreciation 

Low value asset pool at cost 

Less accumulated depreciation 

Total plant and equipment 

Note 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 

74,350           35,328 

(43,514) 

(22,878) 

12(a) 

30,836 

12,450 

12(b) 

12(c) 

302 

- 

302 

2,442 

(1,621) 

821 

- 

- 

- 

1,825 

(1,311) 

514 

31,959 

12,964 

Movements in carrying amounts 
Movement in the carrying amounts for each class of property, plant and equipment between the beginning and the end of 
the current financial year: 

(a) Plant and equipment 
Balance at the beginning of the year 
Additions 
Additions through acquisition of entities 
Reclassification of plant and equipment 
Exchange differences 
Depreciation expense 
Disposals 
Carrying amount at end of year 

(b) Land and buildings  
Balance at the beginning of the year 
Additions through acquisition of entities 
Reclassification from plant and equipment 
Carrying amount at end of year 

(c) Low value asset pool 
Balance at the beginning of the year 
Additions 
Additions through acquisition of entities 
Depreciation expense 
Disposals 
Carrying amount at end of year 

12,450 
16,823 
7,389 
(2,140) 
581 
(4,153) 
(114) 
30,836 

- 
157 
145 
302 

514 
515 
81 
(289) 
- 
821 

11,679 
3,131 
1,839 
- 
221 
(4,111) 
(309) 
12,450 

- 
- 
- 
- 

540 
199 
18 
(241) 
(2) 
514 

The  carrying  amount  of  plant  and  equipment  under  finance  lease  included  above  amounted  to  $6,493,000  (2014: 
$4,562,000). 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 74 

95

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 13:  Intangible Assets  

Goodwill – at cost 
Accumulated impairment loss 

Net carrying amount 

Software development – at cost 

Accumulated amortisation 

Net carrying amount 

Trademarks and brand names – at cost 

Accumulated amortisation  

Accumulated impairment loss 

Net carrying amount 

Customer relationships – at cost 

Accumulated amortisation 

Net carrying amount 

Note 

2015 
$’000 

   2014       

$’000 
Restated  

1,149,577 

108,492 

- 

- 

13(a) 

1,149,577 

108,492 

44,072 

9,661 

(24,208) 

(4,556) 

13(b) 

19,864 

5,105 

81,004 
(5,481) 

- 
75,523 

1,397 

(1,397) 

- 

11,488 

(1,430)  

- 

10,058 

1,397 

(1,397) 

- 

13(c) 

13(d) 

Total intangible assets 

1,244,964 

123,655 

96

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 75 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 13:  Intangible Assets (continued) 

Movements in carrying amount 
Movement in the carrying amounts for each class of intangible assets between the beginning and the end of the current 
financial year: 

(a) Goodwill 
Opening net book amount   
Additions in respect of business combinations 
Exchange differences 
Closing net book value 

(b) Software development 
Opening net book amount   
Additions 
Additions in respect of business combinations 
Reclassification from plant and equipment 
Exchange differences 
Amortisation expense 
Disposals 
Closing net book value 

(c) Trademarks and brand names 
Opening net book amount 
Additions in respect of business combinations 
Exchange differences 
Amortisation expense 
Closing net book value 

(d) Customer relationships 
Opening net book amount   
Amortisation expense 
Closing net book value 

Note 

2015 
$’000 

2014       
$’000 
Restated 

31 

31 

31 

108,492 
1,004,880 
36,205 

1,149,577 

93,504 
11,615 
3,373 
108,492 

5,105 
9,970 
4,512 
1,995 
149 
(1,807) 
(60) 
19,864 

10,058 
66,843 
2,318 
(3,696) 

75,523 

- 
- 
- 

4,714 
1,495 
25 
- 
12 
(1,141) 
- 
5,105 

10,020 
1,110 
332 
(1,404) 
10,058 

58 
(58) 
- 

Goodwill  and indefinite  life intangibles  acquired  through  business combinations  have  been  allocated to  individual cash 
generating  units  (“CGUs”)  in  both  the  Australian  and  UK  business  for  the  purposes  of  impairment  testing  being  the 
Personal Injury Law (“PIL”) division, General Law (“GL”) division and SGS.  

The recoverable amount of goodwill and indefinite life intangibles allocated to each of the CGUs has been determined 
based  on  a  value  in  use  calculation  as  required  by  AASB  136  Impairment  of  Assets.  This  uses  financial  budgets  and 
cash flow projections approved by senior management covering a five year period. 

The  value  in  use  is  compared  to  the  net  carrying  amount  of  the  CGU.  If  the  calculated  value  in  use  exceeds  the  net 
carrying amount, no impairment loss is recorded. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 76 

97

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 13:  Intangible Assets (continued) 

2015 

Goodwill recognised ($’000) 

Indefinite life intangibles ($’000) 

2014 

Goodwill recognised ($’000) 

Indefinite life intangibles ($’000) 

AUS             
PIL 

AUS           
GL 

UK 
PIL 

UK 
GL 

SGS 

47,499 
- 

13,939 
- 

50,843 
1,956 

9,574 
- 

1,027,722 
68,656 

AUS                
PIL  

AUS           
GL 

UK 
PIL 

UK 
GL 

SGS 

44,766 
5,659 

11,575 

- 

43,737 
1,719 

8,414 
- 

- 

- 

Key assumptions used in value in use calculations and sensitivity to changes in assumptions 

The Group performed its annual impairment test in June of 2015. The Group is sensitive to the recovery of fees in its 
legal business, and the velocity of the resolution of those files.  In performing the value-in-use calculations for each CGU, 
the group has applied post-tax discount rates to discount the forecast future post-tax cash flows.  

The key assumptions used in the estimation of the recoverable amount are set out below: 

•  Average fees recoverable for legal matters; 
•  Average file velocity for legal matters; and 
•  Cost of capital and discount rate used. 

Average fees recoverable for legal matters 

Average fees recoverable have been based upon an analysis of historical fee events in each of those practice areas, in 
conjunction with estimated fees of existing matters. 

Individually each of the practice group’s average fee levels is immaterial to the Group result, however should there be a 
material  negative  impact  upon  the  average  fee  recoverable  of  matters  across  a  number  of  practice  groups  in  each 
jurisdiction, this could have a material impact upon the impairment analysis. 

Sensitivity analysis has been conducted on the average fees recoverable for each of the CGUs, a reasonable level of 
negative movement in the average fees recoverable is unlikely to give rise to impairment to any of the CGUs. 

Average file velocity for legal matters 

The  settlement  profile  of  legal  matters  has  been  based  upon  the  average  settlement  period  for  matters  for  each 
jurisdiction and practice area. 

The  velocity  of  settlement  of  legal  matters  has  an  impact  upon  the  sensitivity  analysis.  Individually  a  slowing  of  file 
velocity in a practice area is immaterial, however should there be a material negative impact on the settlement period of 
matters  across  a  number  of  practice  groups  and  jurisdictions;  this  could  have  a  negative  impact  upon  the  estimated 
future value of the CGU on a net present value basis due to the negative impact upon cash flows. 

Sensitivity analysis has been conducted on the average velocity of matters in each of the CGUs and a reasonable level 
of negative movement in the settlement period for matters is unlikely to give rise to impairment to any of the CGUs. 

Cost of capital and discount rate used 

Cost  of  capital  has  been  assessed  per  CGU.    Discount  rates  represent  the  current  market  assessment  of  the  risks 
specific to each CGU, taking into consideration the time value of money and individual risks of the underlying assets that 
have been incorporated in the cash flow estimates.  

The discount rate has been adjusted to be a post-tax rate because in performing the value in use calculations for each 
CGU the Group has used forecast future attributable post-tax cash flows. 

98

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 77 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 13:  Intangible Assets (continued) 
Key assumptions used in value in use calculations and sensitivity to changes in assumptions (continued) 

The  discount  rate  calculation  is  based  on  the  specific  circumstances  of  the  Group  and  its  operating  segments  and  is 
derived  from its  weighted average cost  of capital  (“WACC”).  The WACC  takes into account  both  debt and equity.  The 
cost of equity is derived from the expected return on investment to the Group’s investors. The cost of debt is based on 
the interest-bearing borrowings the Group is obliged to service.  CGU specific risk is incorporated by applying individual 
beta  factors  and  additional  asset  specific  risk  premia  where  appropriate.  The  factors  that  comprise  the  WACC  are 
evaluated annually based on publicly available market data. Adjustments to the discount rate are made having regard to 
the specific amount and timing of the future tax flows in order to reflect an appropriate post-tax discount rate. 

For the Australian PIL, Australian GL, UK PIL and UK GL CGUs a post-tax cost of capital of 9.25% has been applied.  
This  cost  of  capital  has  been  assessed  with  reference  to  the  Company’s  weighted  average  cost  of  capital  and 
independent third party analysis of its cost of capital.  This cost of capital was utilised as the Company has observable 
market  data  to  allow  an  appropriate  assessment  of  its  cost  of  capital  as  a  listed  company  on  the  Australian  Stock 
Exchange.  

The post-tax cost of capital for the SGS CGU was assessed at 10.45%.  This cost of capital was assessed at a higher 
rate than all other CGUs due to the recent acquisition of the CGU by Slater and Gordon and the inherent risk that new 
acquisitions carry with them, as well as the specific risk characteristics of the forecast cash flows.  This increased cost of 
capital represents the increased inherent equity risk associated with the transaction, and reflects the transactions funding 
structure within the calculation. 

Australia – Personal Injury Law 

The recoverable amount of the AUS – PIL CGU has been determined based on a value in use calculation using cash 
flow projections from the financial forecasts approved by senior management covering a five year period. A 5.00% (2014: 
7.70%)  nominal  growth  rate  has  been  applied  to  the  FY16  forecast  for  the  periods  FY17  to  FY20  with  a  long  term 
nominal growth rate adopted of 3.00%. 

The growth rates beyond the 5 year period have been determined with reference to forecast inflation rates, population 
and industry growth rates. 

The  projected  cash  flows  have  been  updated  to  reflect  impacts  of  legislative  change  in  the  NSW  and  Queensland 
jurisdictions and growth achieved in the PIL practice groups over the past five years.  

The post-tax discount rate applied to cash flow projections is 9.25% (2014: 9.10%).   

Sensitivity analysis has been conducted on the key assumptions and a reasonable level of negative movement in each 
assumption does not cause impairment to the CGU. 

Australia – General Law 

The recoverable amount of the AUS – GL CGU has been determined based on a value in use calculation using cash flow 
projections from the financial forecasts approved by senior management covering a five year period. An 8.00% (2014: 
9.12%)  nominal  growth  rate  has  been  applied  to  the  FY16  forecast  for  the  periods  FY17  to  FY20  with  a  long  term 
nominal growth rate adopted of 3.00%. 

The growth rates beyond the 5 year period have been determined with reference to forecast inflation rates, population 
and industry growth rates. 

The projected cash flows have been updated to reflect growth achieved in the General Law practice groups over the past 
five years and the increased marketing expenditure applied to the General Law practice groups over the past year. 

The post-tax discount rate applied to cash flow projections is 9.25% (2014: 9.10%).   

Sensitivity analysis has been conducted on the key assumptions and a reasonable level of negative movement in each 
assumption does not cause impairment to the CGU. 

United Kingdom- Personal Injury Law 

The recoverable amount of the UK – PIL CGU has been determined based on a value in use calculation using cash flow 
projections from the financial forecasts approved by senior management covering a five year period.  

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 78 

99

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 13:  Intangible Assets (continued) 
United Kingdom – Personal Injury Law (continued) 

A 5.00% (2014: 6.80%) nominal growth rate has been applied to the FY16 forecast for the periods FY17 to FY20 with a 
long term nominal growth rate adopted of 3.00%.  

The growth rates beyond the 5 year period have been determined with reference to forecast inflation rates, population 
and industry growth rates. 

The projected cash flows have been updated to reflect the acquisitions of Walker Smith Way, Leo Abse & Cohen and the 
personal injuries practice of Flint Bishop in FY15, increased marketing in the United Kingdom for the Slater and Gordon 
brand which has led to increased brand recognition and growth achieved in the Personal Injuries practice groups since 
acquisition. 

The post-tax discount rate applied to cash flow projections is 9.25% (2014: 9.10%).  

Sensitivity analysis has been conducted on the key assumptions and a reasonable level of negative movement in each 
assumption does not cause impairment to the CGU. 

United Kingdom – General Law 

The  recoverable  amount  of  the  United  Kingdom –  GL  CGU  has  been  determined  based on  a  value in  use calculation 
using cash flow projections from the financial forecasts approved by senior management covering a five year period.  

An 8.00% (2014: 6.80%) nominal growth rate has been applied to the FY16 forecast for the periods FY17 to FY20 with a 
long term nominal growth rate adopted of 3.00%.  

The growth rates beyond the 5 year period have been determined with reference to forecast inflation rates, population 
and industry growth rates. 

The projected cash flows have been updated to reflect the acquisition of Walker Smith Way, increased marketing in the 
United  Kingdom  for  the  Slater  and  Gordon  brand  which  has  led  to  increased  brand  recognition,  in  addition  to  growth 
achieved in the General Law practice groups since acquisition. 

The post-tax discount rate applied to cash flow projections is 9.25% (2014: 9.10%).  

Sensitivity analysis has been conducted on the key assumptions and a reasonable level of negative movement in each 
assumption does not cause impairment to the CGU. 

Slater Gordon Solutions 

The recoverable amount of Slater and Gordon Solutions (“SGS”) CGU, £756m as at 30 June 2015, has been determined 
based  on  a  value  in  use  calculation  using  cash  flow  projections  from  the  financial  forecasts  approved  by  senior 
management covering a five year period.  

Based on the provisional accounting the estimated recoverable amount of the SGS CGU exceeded its carrying amount 
by approximately £123m at 30 June 2015. 

The projected cash flows have been based on financial forecasts by senior management for the periods FY16 to FY18 
with a 2.25% nominal growth rate applied to periods post FY18. This long term growth rate for the SGS CGU has been 
based on the long term economic growth rate. This differs to the long term growth rate assumption applied to the other 
UK CGU’s as SGS was only acquired on 29 May 2015. 

A key driver of performance which may impact an impairment of the SGS CGU is the rate of resolution of personal injury 
claims  (“velocity  of  matters”).  Personal  injury  claims  represent  a  very  large  proportion  of  the  SGS  business  and  if  the 
velocity of matters slows, cash flow will be detrimentally impacted and this may impair goodwill.   

A  sensitivity  analysis  has  been  conducted  to  measure  the  extent  to  which  velocity  would  need  to  be  reduced  before 
goodwill  was  impaired.   The  sensitivity  analysis conducted on  the average  velocity  of  personal  injury  claims  within  the 
SGS  CGU  indicated  a  negative  movement  of  up  to  60%  in  the  settlement  period  for  matters  would  not  cause  an 
impairment to the SGS CGU.   

In addition, cash flows of the SGS CGU were discounted to allow for a 50% discount to the forecast recovery of NIHL 
(Hearing Loss) with no impairment noted to the SGS CGU. 

100

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 79 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 13:  Intangible Assets (continued) 
Slater Gordon Solutions (continued) 

The post-tax discount rate applied to cash flow projections for the SGS CGU is 10.45%.   

This post-tax cost of capital was assessed at a higher rate than all other CGUs due to the recent acquisition of the CGU 
by  Slater  and  Gordon  and  the  inherent  risk  that  new  acquisitions  carry  with  them,  as  well  as  the  specific  risk 
characteristics  of  the  forecast  cash  flows.    This  increased cost  of  capital  represents  the increased  inherent  equity  risk 
associated with the transaction, and reflects the transactions funding structure within the calculation. 

Sensitivity analysis has been conducted on the cost of capital for the SGS CGU and the Directors noted that an increase 
of  the  post-tax  discount  rate  to  12.0%  was  required  before  the  carrying  value  of  the  CGU  equalled  its  recoverable 
amount. This represented an increase of over 14.8% on the post-tax discount rate adopted by the Company.  

Note 14:  Other Non-Current Assets 

VCR share loans to employees 
Other non-current assets 

Note 15:  Payables 

Current 

Unsecured liabilities 
Trade creditors and accruals 
Legal creditors  
Vendor liabilities – acquisitions 

Non-current 
Unsecured liabilities 
Vendor liabilities – acquisitions 

Note 16:  Borrowings 

Current 

Secured 

Cash advances – bills of exchange 

Finance lease liability 

Non-current 

Secured 

Cash advances – bills of exchange 

Finance lease liability 

2015 
$’000 

8,325 
6,854 

15,179 

    2014 
$’000 

11,844 
- 

11,844 

2015 
$’000 

    2014 

$’000         

Restated 

281,169 
336,588 
18,765 
636,522 

74,792 
101,554 
14,181 
190,527 

3,121 

7,385 

Note 

2015 
$’000 

   2014 
$’000  

447 

3,306 

3,753 

7,215 

1,862 

9,077 

710,477 

6,123 

716,600 

112,698 

4,556 

117,254 

32 

32 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 80 

101

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 16:  Borrowings (continued) 

(a) 

Terms and conditions relating to the above financial instruments: 

The cash advance facility is a Syndicated Banking Facility provided by a syndicate of banks including Westpac Banking 
Corporation (“Westpac”) and National Australia Bank (“NAB”). Refer to Note 32 (ii) for more details. They are secured by 
a fixed and floating charge over the assets of the Company.  

Interest on the bank overdraft is charged at BBSY plus an agreed margin.  

(b) 

(c) 

A portion of the bills of exchange cash advance facility is the subject of an interest rate swap to hedge the risk of 
an adverse interest rate movement. Refer to Note 32 (iv) for more details. 

The  Group  leases  certain  of  its  fixed  assets  under  finance  leases.  The  lease  terms  range  from  3  to  10  years            
(2014: 3 to 10 years). The Group has options to purchase the equipment for a nominal amount at the end of the 
lease terms. The Group’s obligations under finance leases are secured by the lessors’ title to the leased assets. 

Interest rates underlying all obligations under finance leases are fixed at respective contract, rates ranging from 3.2% to 
9.25% (2014: 3.96% to 9.25%) per annum. 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 
Restated 

Future 
minimum 
lease 
payment 

3,784 
6,778 
- 
10,562 

Interest 

(478) 
(655) 
- 
(1,133) 

Present 
value of 
minimum 
lease 
payment 
3,306 
6,123 
- 
9,429 

Future 
Minimum 
lease 
payment 
2,270 
4,985 
357 
7,612 

Interest 
(408) 
(777) 
(9) 
(1,194) 

Present 
value of 
minimum 
lease 
payment 
1,862 
4,208 
348 
6,418 

Within one year 

One year or later and not later than five years 
Greater than five years 

Note 17:  Other Current Liabilities 

Current 
Unsecured 
LLP member capital contributions 

Note 18:  Provisions 

Current 
Employee benefits 
Solicitor liability claims 
Provision for payments to former owners 
Other current provisions 

Non-current 
Employee benefits 
Other non-current provisions 

102

Slater and Gordon Limited 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 

10,985 

10,985 

10,103 
10,103 

2015 
$’000 

         2014 
$’000 
Restated 

18,638 
4,708 
9,969 
1,172 
34,487 

3,367 
8,508 
11,875 

15,550 
918 

3,656 
- 
20,124 

3,164 
1,596 
4,760 

Page 81 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 19:  Contributed Equity 

Ordinary shares fully paid 
VCR Shares 

Balance at end of the year 

Note 

19(a) 
19(b) 

2015 
Shares 

350,719,894 
833,334 

2015 
$’000 
1,097,928 
417 

351,553,228 

1,098,345 

2014 
Shares 
204,338,625 
2,629,333 
     206,967,958 

2014 
$’000 Restated 
214,514 
2,535 
217,049 

(a)  Movement in Ordinary Share Capital 

  204,338,625 
Balance at the beginning of the year                                                    

214,514 

196,809,265 

206,506 

Issued during the year  
- Consideration for acquisitions 
- Conversion of vested VCR shares 
- Dividend Reinvestment Plan 
- Equity Incentive Plan 
- Shares issued through Entitlement Offer* 
- Transfer from share-based payment reserve 
Less capital raising costs, net of tax 
Balance at end of the year 

4,873,700 
1,275,333 
257,719 
151,668 
139,822,849 
- 
- 
350,719,894 

2,679 
2,397 
1,696 
759 
890,939 
6,199 
(21,255) 
1,097,928 

4,463,219 
2,120,333 
945,808 
- 
- 
- 
- 
204,338,625 

(134) 
4,008 
3,863 
- 
- 
391 
(120) 
214,514 

*The Group made two Entitlement Offers during the year to eligible shareholders to raise finance for the acquisition of SGS being the 
Institutional  Entitlement  Offer  and  a  Retail  Entitlement  offer.  Under  the  Entitlement  Offers,  eligible  shareholders  were  invited  to 
subscribe for two ordinary shares for every three existing ordinary shares held at the record date per the ASX announcement. Each new 
share ranks equally with the existing shares.  

(b)  Movements in VCR Share Capital 

Balance at the beginning of the year 

- Conversion of vested VCR shares to ordinary shares 
- Employee share scheme buy-back: 

Share based payments expense 

Equity adjustment for leavers and extension of repayment term 
Balance at end of the year 
Ordinary shares 

Note 

2015 
Shares 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
Shares 

2014 
$’000 

2,629,333 
(1,275,333) 
(520,666) 

- 

- 
833,334 

2,535 
(2,397) 
(161) 

991 

(551) 
417 

5,111,334 
(2,120,333) 
(361,668) 
- 

- 
2,629,333 

5,867 
(4,008) 
(438) 
1,180 

(66) 
2,535 

Ordinary shares participate in dividends and the proceeds on winding up of the Company in proportion to the number of 
shares held. At shareholders meetings each ordinary share is entitled to one vote when a poll is called, otherwise each 
shareholder has one vote on a show of hands. 

VCR shares 

Please refer to Note 27 for detailed discussion on the rights attached to VCR shares. 

Capital management 

When  managing  capital,  management’s  objective  is  to  ensure  the  Group  continues  to  maintain  optimal  returns  to 
shareholders  and  benefits  for  other  stakeholders.  This  is  achieved  through  the  monitoring  of  historical  and  forecast 
performance and cash flows. 

During 2015, management paid dividends of $17,620,000 (2014: $13,770,000) 

Management manages capital through the gearing ratio i.e. net bank debt / total equity. Net bank debt is calculated as 
total bank borrowings as shown in the statement of financial position less cash and cash equivalents. The target for the 
Group’s gearing ratio is between 30% to 40%. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 82 

103

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 20:  Reserves  

Cash flow hedging reserve 

Foreign currency translation reserve 

Share-based payment reserve 

Note 

20(a) 

20(b) 

20(c) 

2015 
$’000 

(1,189) 
73,447 
10,619 
82,877 

     2014 

$’000        

Restated 

(780) 
10,009 
4,988 
14,217 

Movements in carrying amount 
Movement in the carrying amounts for each class of reserve between the beginning and the end of the current financial 
year. 

(a)  Cash flow hedging reserve 

Balance at the beginning of the year 
Loss recognised on interest rate hedges, net of tax 
Balance at the end of the year 

(b)  Foreign currency translation reserve 

Balance at the beginning of the year 
Currency translation differences arising during the year 
Non-controlling interest share in translation reserve 

Balance at the end of the year 

(c)  Share-based payment reserve 

Balance at the beginning of the year 
Equity-settled share-based payment expense recognised 
Transfer to share capital 

Balance at the end of the year 

Nature and purpose of reserves 

Cash flow hedging reserve 

(780) 
(409) 
(1,189) 

10,009 
63,542 
(104) 

73,447 

4,988 
11,830 

(6,199) 
10,619 

(473) 
(307) 
(780) 

4,183 
5,833 
(7) 
10,009 

- 
5,379 

(391) 

4,988 

The cash flow hedging reserve represents the cumulative net change in the fair value of cash flow hedging instruments 
related to hedge transactions that have not yet occurred, net of tax. 

Foreign currency translation reserve 

Exchange differences arising on translation of foreign controlled entities are recognised in other comprehensive income 
and accumulated in a separate reserve within equity. The cumulative amount is reclassified to profit or loss when the net 
investment is disposed of. 

Share-based payment reserve 

The  Group  introduced  the  Equity  Incentive  Plan  (“EIP”)  in  October  2014,  which  replaces  the  existing  Employee 
Ownership Plan (“EOP”) without prejudice to the rights of current participants in the EOP. Under the terms of the EIP, 
performance  rights  offers  were  extended  to  executives  in  October  and  December  2014.  All  offers  were  accepted  and 
496,000 performance rights have been issued at the Group level, including a shareholder approved allocation of 56,000 
performance  rights  (combined)  to  executive  directors.  The  performance  rights  vest  based  on  a  three  year  service 
condition and the financial performance of the Australian, UK or Group operations (depending on the executive role) over 
the three financial years FY15 to FY17. Performance measures include total shareholder return and earnings measures. 
Each performance right grants the holder one ordinary share if vested, hence they have been included in the calculation 
of diluted earnings per share. Refer to Note 27 for more details. 

104

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 83 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 21:  Retained Profits 

Retained profits 

(a)  Retained profits 
Balance at the beginning of year 
Net profit attributable to ordinary equity holders 
Total available for appropriation 
Dividends paid 
Balance at end of year 

Note 22:  Non-Controlling Interests 

Interest in: 
Share capital 
Reserves 
Retained profits 
Balance at end of year 

(a)  Non-controlling interests 
Balance at the beginning of the year 
Capital contributions from non-controlling interests 
Non-controlling interest share in net profit after tax 
Non-controlling interest share in translation reserve 
Balance at the end of the year 

Note 

2015 
$’000 

     2014 
$’000 
Restated 

21(a) 

253,147 

187,213 

7 

Note 

22(a) 

187,213 
83,554 
270,767 
(17,620) 
253,147 

132,963 
68,020 
200,983 
(13,770) 
187,213 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 
Restated 

- 
104 
520 
624 

271 
- 
249 
104 
624 

- 
7 
264 
271 

161 
(113) 
216 
7 
271 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 84 

105

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 23:  Cash Flow Information 

Note 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 
Restated 

(a)  Reconciliation of cash 

For  the  purposes  of  the  consolidated  statement  of  cash  flows,  cash  includes  cash  on  hand  and  at  call  deposits  with 
banks or financial institutions, investments in money market instruments maturing within less than three months and net 
of bank overdrafts. 

Cash at the end of the financial year as shown in the consolidated statement of cash flows is reconciled to the related 
items in the statement of financial position as follows: 

Cash on hand 

(b)  Reconciliation of cash flow from operations with profit after income 
tax 
Profit after income tax 
Non-cash flows in profit from ordinary activities 
Notional interest on VCR share loans 
Depreciation and amortisation 
Share based payments expenses 
Accrual for payments to former owners 
Costs associated with acquisition 
Notional interest on deferred consideration 
Bad and doubtful debts 
Deferred costs of borrowing 
Gain on bargain purchase 

8 

4 
5 

5 

5 

Changes in assets and liabilities 
Increase in receivables 
Increase in other assets  
Increase in work in progress 
Increase in payables 
Decrease in income tax payable 
Increase in net deferred tax liability 
Increase in provisions 
Cash flows from operations 

96,985 

96,985 

25,270 

25,270 

83,803 

68,236 

(975) 
9,945 
13,537 
13,933 
23,662 
1,942 
11,585 
217 
(58,939) 

(67,445) 
(2,690) 
(62,027) 
44,171 
(4,128) 
29,298 
4,873 
40,762 

(1,428) 
6,955 
6,559 
3,651 
4,054 
2,502 
6,904 
- 
(19,762) 

(12,846) 
(170) 
(45,382) 
13,806 
(7,670) 
24,683 
4,343 
54,435 

106

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 85 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 24:  Commitments and Contingencies 

Operating lease commitments 

Non-cancellable  operating  leases  (including  rental  of  office  space)  contracted  but  not  capitalised  in  the  consolidated 
financial statements: 

Note 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 

Within one year 
One year or later and not later than five years 
Greater than five years 

31,223 
76,894 
65,007 
173,124 

20,815 
43,920 
6,911 
71,646 

Bank guarantees in respect of rental properties and acquisitions 

28,621 

9,255 

Other commitments and contingencies 

The  Group  has  agreements  with  third  party  disbursement  funders,  ASK  Funding  Limited  and  Equal  Access  Funding 
Proprietary Limited (“the existing Funders”), to provide financial guarantees to the funders with respect to disbursement 
funding borrowings to the Group’s clients. The nature of these agreements are that the funders will fund disbursements 
in  respect  of  individual  matters  and  will  be  reimbursed  out  of  any  settlement  proceeds  on  the  matter.  The  Group  has 
provided a financial guarantee for the repayment of the clients’ obligations to the funders. Nowicki Carbone also had in 
place agreements with third party disbursement funders, Wingate Funding Limited and Quantum Funding Limited (“the 
assumed Funders”) on similar terms to the existing Funders arrangements and these have been assumed by the Group 
from the date of the acquisition, 31 October 2014. 

Since  30  June  2014,  the  Group  ended  its  arrangement  with  ASK  Funding  and  settled  all  disbursements  previously 
funded  by  ASK  Funding  and  recognised  them  as  part  of  the  receivables  balance  at  30  June  2015.  The  total  amount 
funded  by  the  funders  (existing  and  assumed)  to  the  Group’s  clients  at  30  June  15  is  $18,851,000  (30  June  2014: 
$12,881,000).  The  maximum  exposure  of 
$12,881,000) if the disbursements on client matters are not recovered from any other party. 

the  Group  at  30  June  2015 

is  $18,851,000  (30  June  2014:                

Refer to Note 31 Business Combinations for disclosures on contingencies arising from businesses acquired during the 
year. 

Note 25:  Earnings per Share 
The following reflects the income and share data used in the calculations of basic and diluted earnings per 
share 

Net profit after tax attributable to ordinary equity holders 

Earnings used in calculating basic and diluted earnings per share 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares used in calculating basic earnings 
per share (‘000’s) 

Effect of dilutive securities:  
VCR shares (‘000’s) 
Performance rights 

Adjusted weighted average number of ordinary shares used in calculating diluted 
earnings per share (‘000’s) 

Note 

2015     
$’000 

83,554 
83,554 

2014     
$’000 
Restated 
68,020 
68,020 

234,842 

201,306 

1,377 
303 

3,437 
- 

236,522 

204,743 

VCR shares 

VCR  shares  are  considered  to  be  potential  ordinary  shares  and  have  been  included  in  the  determination  of  diluted 
earnings per share. Refer to Note 27 for a detailed explanation of VCR shares. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 86 

107

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 26:  Key Management Personnel Compensations  

Compensation by Category 
Short-term employment benefits 
Post-employment benefits   
Other long term employment benefits 
Share based payments 
Other benefits 

Note 

2015 
$ 

2014 
$ 

3,695,822 
210,384 
54,954 
49,084 
20,783 

3,490,437 
160,778 
86,633 
11,745 
240,666 

4,031,027 

3,990,259 

Note 27:  Share-Based Payment Arrangements  
The  Group  introduced  a  broad  based  ‘share  save’  offer  to  all  employees  and  a  new  Employee  Equity  Incentive  Plan 
(“EIP”) which was approved by the shareholders at the 2014 Annual General Meeting (“AGM”). 

Employee equity incentive plan (“EIP”)  

During the year ended 30 June 2015 the Group introduced an offer for Exempt Shares in the Equity Incentive Plan. The 
Plan gives the Group’s employees the opportunity to acquire shares in the Company. Each year, participating employees 
can  make  contributions  from  their  pre-tax  salary  to  acquire  $500  worth  of  shares.  Such  employee  contributions  are 
matched  by  the  Group  with  an  additional  $500  worth  of  shares  being  acquired  for  each  participating  employee.  All 
employees  who  are  Australian  tax  residents  with  at  least  6  months  service  as  at  21  October  2014  are  entitled  to 
participate in this Plan. Shares acquired under this Plan are subject to a holding period of 3 years.   

The plan also incorporates a tax-approved scheme to employees in the UK. The Plan gives the Group’s employees the 
opportunity  to  acquire  shares in  the  Company.  Employees  can  make contributions  from  their  pre-tax  salary  to  acquire 
£375 (max) worth of shares. Such employee contributions are matched by the Group with a free share for every share 
purchased by the employee. All employees of the Group in the UK  with at least 6 months service as at 14 November 
2014 are entitled to participate in this Plan. Shares acquired under this plan will be held in trust by MM&K Share Plan 
Trustee Ltd for a period of 5 years from the date of acquisition.  

Executive equity incentive plan  

The plan introduces an ownership-based compensation scheme for executives and senior employees. In October 2014, 
the Company’s shareholders approved the S+G Executive Equity Incentive Scheme under which grants of performance 
rights have been made. The EIP replaces the existing Employee Ownership Plan (“EOP”), without prejudice to the rights 
of current participants in the EOP. 

Performance rights are granted for no consideration. Under the scheme each performance right carries an entitlement to 
one  fully  paid  ordinary  share  in  the  Company  subject  to  satisfaction  of  performance  hurdles  and/or  continued 
employment at an exercise price of nil. These executives and senior employees are not entitled to vote or receive any 
dividends  or  attend  the  meeting  of  the  shareholders  during  the  vesting  period.  Performance  rights  may  not  be 
transferred,  disposed  or  pledged  as  security.  If  the  executive  ceases  to  be  employed  by  the  Group  within  the  vesting 
period, the rights will be forfeited, except in limited circumstances that are approved by the Board.  

The performance hurdles are based on the following: 

•  Total Shareholder Return (TSR) Outperformance Hurdle – This performance hurdle is based on the Company’s total 
shareholder  return  (TSR)  against  the  TSR  of  the  constituent  companies  within  the  S&P/ASX  300  index  (excluding 
resources) over the Measurement Period. The performance period shall be the period from 1 September 2014 to    31 
August 2017.  

•  Compound  Annual  Growth  Rate  in  Earnings  Per  Share  (CAGR  EPS)  Hurdle  –  This  performance  hurdle  is  based            

on the Company’s Compound Annual Growth Rate in Earnings Per Share over the Measurement Period. 

•  Compound Annual Growth Rate in Regional EBITDA (CAGR EBITDA) Hurdle – This performance hurdle is based on 

the designated Region’s Compound Annual Growth Rate in EBITDA over the Measurement Period.  

108

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 87 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 27:  Share-Based Payment Arrangements (continued) 
The performance conditions applying to the latest grant (FY15) were as follows: 

CAGR EPS Hurdle (Group 
Directors only) 

CAGR EPS Hurdle  

TSR Outperformance 
Hurdle 

CAGR EBITDA 

Performance 

< 10% 

10% to 15% 

% of 
equity 
to vest 

0% 
50% to 
100% 
pro-rata 

Performance 

< 7% 

7% to 10% 

% of 
equity to 
vest 

0% 
50% to 
100% pro-
rata 

> 15% 

100% 

> 10% 

100% 

Performance 
< 50th 
percentile 

50th to 75th 
percentile 
> 75th 
percentile 

% of 
equity to 
vest 

0% 
50% to 
100% 
pro-rata 

Performance 

< 15% 

15% to 20% 

% of 
equity to 
vest 

0% 
50% to 
100% pro-
rata 

100% 

> 20% 

100% 

Any performance rights not vested at the end of the performance period are forfeited. 

The fair value of services received in return for the performance rights granted is measured by reference to the average 
of volume weighted average price of ordinary shares on each of 5, 10, 15 and 20 days immediately preceding the grant 
date. The weighted average fair values at grant date are determined using a fair valuation model which reflects the fact 
that vesting of the shares is dependent on meeting performance criteria based on TSR. The vesting of the shares is also 
subject  to  non-market  conditions but  these  are  not  taken  into  account  in  the  grant date fair  value measurement  of  the 
services received. The assessed fair value of performance rights granted under this scheme as remuneration is allocated 
equally over the period from grant date to vesting date. 

The key terms and conditions related to the performance rights granted under this plan are as follows:  

Grant date/employee entitled 

Group Executive Directors in Australia (31 
October 2014) 

Performan
ce rights 
granted 
56,000 

Fair value of 
rights at 
Grant date 
2.4643 

Group Executives in Australia (31 October 
2014) 
Group Executives in the UK (12 December 
2014) 
Regional Executives in Australia (31 
October 2014) 

68,000 

2.4643 

44,000 

2.4799 

Same as above 

176,000 

6.1608 

Vesting conditions* 

50% subject to TSR 
Outperformance hurdle 
and 50% subject to 
CAGR EPS hurdle 
Same as above 

50% subject to CAGR 
EBITDA hurdle and 
50% subject to CAGR 
EPS hurdle 
Same as above 

Contractual life 
of performance 
rights 
3 years 

3 years 

3 years 

3 years 

3 years 

Regional Executives in the UK (12 
December 2014) 

152,000 

6.1997 

* All performance rights include 3 years’ service condition from grant date.    

Number of rights granted: 

Grant date 

31 October 2014 
12 December 2014 

Balance at 
beginning 
of the year 
- 
- 

Granted during 
the year 

300,000 
196,000 

Vested 
during the 
year 
- 
- 

Forfeited 
during the 
year 
- 
- 

Balance at 
end of the 
year 
300,000 
196,000 

Exercisable 
at end of the 
year 
- 
- 

Share-based payment expenses recognised in profit or loss are disclosed in Note 5.  

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 88 

109

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 27:  Share-Based Payment Arrangements (continued) 
Share based payment arrangements to former owners 

The  Group  has changed  its  accounting  treatment  of deferred  consideration  payable for  the  acquisition  of legal service 
practices.  Arrangements  that  include  contingent  consideration  to  vendors  of  the  business  that  are  subject  to  so-called 
“bad  leaver”  provisions  were  previously  considered  as  part  of  the  consideration  paid  or  payable  for  the  business 
combination.  

Included in the terms of a number of purchase agreements entered into by the Group is an arrangement whereby the 
payment of cash consideration to and/or the retention of share-based consideration by the vendors of acquired entities is 
contingent upon the relevant vendors remaining with the Group for a defined period.  If a vendor ceases to remain with 
the Group for the prescribed period, the vendor may forfeit its entitlement to payment of the cash consideration and/or its 
ability to retain its share-based consideration, at the discretion of the Group. 

These arrangements are now treated as a share-based payment transaction with the former owners. The transaction is 
measured at the fair value of the equity instruments granted and then recognised as an expense over the vesting period 
as agreed per each contract. The relevant expense is disclosed in the statement of comprehensive income. 

Employee ownership plan (“EOP”) 

The EOP provides for the issue of VCR shares to participants in a number of tranches and for the Company to make a 
loan to participants equal to the total amount that is to be subscribed. 

When making an offer to an employee to subscribe for VCR shares, the Board has the power to specify: 

• 

• 

• 

• 

the number of VCR shares which may be subscribed for by a particular employee; 

the issue price. The Board sets the issue price at the fair value of a share as at the date of the issue; 

the number of tranches into which the VCR shares will be divided and the vesting date for each tranche; 

the period for which an absolute restriction on disposal will apply (this period may not exceed 3 years from vesting); 

•  any conditions to be placed on vesting; 

•  any events which would result in the forfeiture of the VCR shares; and 

• 

the period for which the Company will be able to buy back or require the forfeiture of the converted shares. 

The EOP provides for a full recourse loan from the Company to the employee to facilitate the employee’s subscription for 
VCR shares. The loan is secured by the VCR shares or the converted VCR shares. The offer made by the Board must 
specify the date by which the loan must be repaid. 

Vesting, redemptions and conversion 

VCR shares do not carry rights to participate in issues by the Company or to receive any dividends paid by the Company 
and cannot be transferred or otherwise disposed of without the prior written consent of the Board. VCR shares will not 
confer a right to notices of general meetings, a right to attend or speak at general meetings, nor a right to vote at general 
meetings except as may be required by law. 

Vesting  conditions  are  set  by  the  Board  and  relate  to  the  performance  of  the  participant  and  the  performance  of  the 
Company. Cessation of employment with the Group results in the forfeiture of that participant’s VCR shares. The Board 
has the power to specify other forfeiture events.  

Where vesting conditions are not met or a forfeiture event occurs, the Company has the power to redeem the relevant 
tranche  (or  tranches)  of  VCR  shares  for  an  amount  equal  to  the  relevant  proportion  of  the  subscribed  amount  (this 
amount may be offset against any loan made to the participant).   

If all vesting conditions are satisfied, and no forfeiture event has occurred, each tranche of VCR shares vests, and then 
automatically converts to ordinary shares on a one for one basis, on the relevant vesting date. 

110

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 89 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 27:  Share-Based Payment Arrangements (continued) 
After conversion 

After conversion the shares rank in all respects pari passu with all other shares on issue. However those shares will be 
subject to disposal restrictions.  

If the participant ceases employment with the Group, their converted VCR shares can be forfeited or bought back by the 
Company and set off against any outstanding loan. The participant may be deemed liable for any shortfall between the 
value of the shares forfeited or brought back by the Company and the loan amount. 

At  the  cessation  of  the  Buyback  Period,  each  participant  is  required  to  enter  into  a  Binding  Commitment  with  the 
Company in respect of their converted VCR shares. Under the Binding Commitment the participants in the EOP will be 
under the following restrictions: 

They will be required to maintain a minimum level of shareholding for as long as they remain an employee of the Group.  
The minimum holding is calculated based on the: 

• 

• 

lower of 15% of the aggregate number of VCR shares, or 20% of the aggregate value (based on the issue price) of 
VCR shares, issued to that employee which have vested and converted to shares. 

if they cease to be employed by the Group, they may forfeit or be required to dispose of some or all of their shares 
upon  such  termination.  The  ramifications  of  a  departure  from  employment  are  linked  to  the  circumstances 
surrounding that departure. 

Transfer 

VCR  shares  may  not  be  transferred.  During  the  Buyback  Period,  converted  VCR  shares  may  not  be  transferred; 
however,  an  exception  applies  for  a  takeover  or  scheme  of  arrangement  relating  to  the  Company  that  meets  certain 
conditions set out in the EOP. 

Profile of vesting, conversion and redemption of VCR shares to ordinary shares 

The  profile  of  the  vesting  of  VCR  shares  relating  to  the  issued  VCR  shares  in  February  2011,  December  2011, 
December  2012  and  February  2013  into  ordinary  shares,  conversion  into  ordinary  shares  (subject  to  disposal 
restrictions) or scheduled for redemption as VCR shares based on the shares issued under the EOP as at 30 June 2015: 

VCR shares which have (or may) vest as ordinary 
shares 
VCR shares which may convert to ordinary 
shares but are subject to disposal restrictions 
VCR shares to be redeemed 

Vested 
’000 

4,954 

1,959 

1 year or 
less 
’000 

1 to 5 
years 
’000 

More than 
5 years 
’000 

833 

- 

1,840 

1,988 

- 

75 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Total 
’000 

5,787 

5,787 

75 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 90 

111

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 27:  Share-Based Payment Arrangements (continued) 
Accounting recognition 

The VCR Share loan receivable is initially recognised at its fair value and is ascertained with reference to the effective 
interest  method  under  AASB  139  Financial  Instruments:  Recognition  and  Measurement.  The  profit  and  loss  impact  is 
taken as the difference between the expected repayment period and the expected present value of the loan amount at 
the reporting date and is recognised as interest income. 

The key assumptions used in the present value calculation are:  

Date VCR shares issued 

22 February 2011 

31 December 2011 

Shares issued 
Issue price 
Effective interest rate 

Final repayment date 

1,830,000 
$2.05 
8.5% 
1 July 2014 to 
1 July 2016 

2,390,000 
$1.79 
8.5% 
1 July 2015 to 
1 July 2017 

20 December 2012 
and 
25 February 2013 
2,425,000 
$1.95 
8.5% 
1 July 2016 to 
1 July 2018 

The interest income recognised on VCR Share loans to employees has been disclosed in Note 4. 

The benefit provided to the employee is required to be recognised in the accounts under AASB 2 Share-based Payment.  
The benefit is assessed as the difference between the fair value of the VCR shares at the issue date and the present 
value  discounted  over  the  vesting  period.  The  benefit  is  expensed  with  reference  to  the  effective  interest  rate  method 
over the vesting period. The share based payments expense has been disclosed in Note 5. 

Note 28:  Auditor’s Remuneration  

Amounts received or due and receivable by Pitcher Partners: 
An audit of the financial report of the Group and review of statutory accounts 
The half year review of the financial report of the Group 
Other assurance services 
Due diligence investigations 
IT review 

Amounts received or due and receivable by network firms of Pitcher 
Partners: 

An audit of the financial report of the Group and review of statutory accounts 
Other assurance services 

Other auditors – Ernst & Young LLP: 

An audit of the financial reports of the subsidiaries of the Company and review of 
statutory accounts 

Due diligence investigations 

Note 

2015 
$ 

2014 
$ 

276,623 
106,500             
106,500  
39,227               
39,227  
177,860 
- 
600,210 

247,198 
97,788 
12,130 
15,900 
5,427 
378,443 

302,434 
4,245 
306,679 

228,355 
- 
228,355 

1,614,080 

1,475,791 
3,089,871 

- 

- 
- 

Total auditor’s remuneration 

3,996,760 

606,798 

112

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 91 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 29:  Related Party Disclosures  
The  following  provides  the  total  amount  of  transactions  that  were  entered  into  with  related  parties  for  the  relevant 
financial year:  

As  outlined  in  the  replacement  Prospectus  (“the  Prospectus”)  dated  13  April  2007  the  South  Australian  practice  is 
operated  by  Andrew  Grech  as  a  sole  practitioner  trading  as  Slater  &  Gordon  Lawyers  under  a  Service  and  Licence 
Agreement between Andrew Grech and the Company.  During the 3 months ended 30 September 2014, the service and 
licence fee totalled $531,532 (2014: $1,184,937).  

Legislation in South Australia changed with effect from 1 July 2014 to allow for incorporated legal practices to operate in 
South  Australia.  As  a  consequence,  the  Adelaide  practice  was  transferred  from  Andrew  Grech  trading  as  Slater  & 
Gordon Lawyers to the Company for the value of the practice’s net assets at 30 September 2014. The net asset value 
was fully offset by amounts owed to the Company pursuant to the service and license agreement.  

As  disclosed  in  Note  1,  this  entity  is  included  in  the  consolidated  group  in  accordance  with  AASB  10  Consolidated 
Financial Statements. 

The shareholdings of related parties and remuneration of KMP are disclosed in the Directors’ Report. 

Outstanding  receivables,  if  any,  between  related  parties  are  disclosed  in  Note  9.  Outstanding  payables,  if  any,  are 
disclosed in Note 15. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 92 

113

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 30: Group Entities 

Controlled entities 
Trilby Misso Lawyers Limited 
Slater & Gordon Lawyers NSW Pty Limited 
Conveyancing Works (Qld) Pty Limited 
Schultz Toomey O’Brien Pty Ltd 
All States Legal Co Pty Ltd 
SG NSW Pty Ltd 
Walker Smith Way Limited 
WSW Limited 
Slater & Gordon (UK) 1 Limited 
New Claims Direct Limited 
4 Legal Limited 
4 Legal Solutions Limited  
Slater & Gordon (UK) LLP  
Adroit Financial Planning Limited 
Pannone Trust Corporation Limited 

Entities collectively referred to as Slater Gordon Solutions: 
iSaaS Technology Limited 
Compass Costs Consultants Ltd 
Intelligent Claims Management Limited 
Mobile Doctors Group Limited 
Medici Legal Limited 
Mobile Doctors Solutions Limited 
Mobile Doctors Limited 
MDL Medical Administration Ltd 
React & Recover Medical Group Limited 
Recover Healthcare Limited 
React Medical Reporting Limited 
React Medical Management Limited 
Medicalaw Limited 
Abstract Legal Holdings Limited 
Accident Advice Helpline Direct Limited 
Legal Facilities Management & Services Limited 
Fast Track PPI Limited 
Access to Compensation Limited 
Cab Claims Limited 
Liberty Protect Limited 
Claim4 Limited 
Accident Advice Helpline Limited 
Claim 103 Limited 
Accident Advice Insurance Management Group Limited 
Sentinel Alliance Limited  
Accident Advice (IA) Limited 
Quindell Legal Services Limited 
Quindell ACH Limited 
ACH Group Management Limited 
ACH Access Legal Limited 
ACH Claims Limited 
ACH Media Solutions Limited 
ACH Medical Limited 
ACH Broker Services Ltd 
ACH Quote Me Cover Me Limited 

Country of 
incorporation 

Australia 
Australia 
Australia 
Australia 
Australia 
Australia 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 

United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 

United Kingdom 

2015 
Ownership 
Interest (%) 

2014 
Ownership 
Interest (%) 

100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 

100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 

100 

100 
100 
100 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

114

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 93 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 30: Group Entities (continued) 

Controlled entities (continued) 

Country of 
incorporation 

2015 
Ownership 
Interest (%) 

2014 
Ownership 
Interest (%) 

Entities collectively referred to as Slater Gordon Solutions (continued): 
Crusader Assistance Group Holdings Limited 
Accident & Equity Limited 
Crusader Group Holdings Limited 
Centurion Uninsured Loss Recovery Services Limited 
Equi-Medical Reports Limited 
Equi Rehab Limited 
Crusader Uninsured Loss Recovery Service Limited 
Crusader Connect Limited 
Quindell Business Process Services (UK) Limited 
Colegate Vehicle Hire Limited 
Colegate Accident Assistance Ltd 
Auto Indemnity (UK) Limited 
Overland Limited 
Overland Health Limited 
Overland Malta (Trading) Limited 
Overland Legal Limited* 
Property Home Buyers Limited* 

United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 
United Kingdom 

Malta 
Malta 
Malta 
Malta 
Malta 

100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 

75 
60 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

*Entities under voluntary liquidation since November 2014. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 94 

115

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 31:  Business Combinations  
2015: 

Acquisition of business – All States Legal Co Pty Ltd trading as Nowicki Carbone (provisionally accounted) 

On  31  October  2014,  the  Group  acquired  the  business  of  Nowicki  Carbone,  a  personal  injury  law  firm  based  in 
Melbourne, Victoria. 

The strategic rationale for this business acquisition is: 

• 

to further expand the Group’s personal injury law practice; 

•  synergies expected to be achieved as a result of combining the acquired business with the rest of the Group; and 

• 

to reaffirm the Group’s position as the leading law firm brand in the Australian consumer legal services market. 

The consideration transferred and the value of the assets and liabilities assumed at the date of acquisition are as follows: 

Consideration 
Cash 
Net present value of total consideration  

Net assets acquired 

Assets 
- Trade and other receivables 
- Work in progress 
- Plant and equipment 
- Intangible assets 
- Deferred taxation 
- Other assets 
Total assets acquired 

Liabilities 
- Bank overdraft 
- Payables 
- Provisions 
- Borrowings 
Total liabilities acquired 
Net assets acquired 
Gain from bargain purchase 

         $’000 

10,000 
10,000 

Fair Value 

$’000 

3,899 
39,209 
993 
57 
770 
  1,802 
        46,730 

(151) 
(3,683) 
   (511) 
 (318) 
  (4,663) 
42,067 
(32,067) 

The  initial  accounting  for  the acquisition  of  Nowicki  Carbone  has  only  been  provisionally  determined at  the  end  of  the 
reporting period. 

Since the acquisition date, Nowicki Carbone has contributed profit after tax of $9,981,000 in the period ended 30 June 
2015, which is included in the consolidated profit.  As at the date of reporting, it is not practical to disclose the revenue 
and  profit  after  tax  of  the combined  entity  as  if  the  acquisition  took place on 1  July  2014  as the  Group does  not  have 
access  to  audited  financial  information  for  the  period  prior  to  the  date  of  acquisition  prepared  on  the  same  Group 
accounting policies. 

Acquisition-related costs for this acquisition amounting to $270,000 have been excluded from the total consideration and 
have been recognised as an expense in the period ended 30 June 2015, within the ‘costs associated with acquisitions’ 
line item in the statement of profit or loss. 

116

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 95 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 31:  Business Combinations (continued) 
Acquisition of other businesses in Australia  

During the year ended 30 June 2015, the Group acquired the following businesses in Australia: 

  Acquisition Date 
  31 July 2014 
  5 September 2014 
  12 September 2014 
  31 October 2014 
  28 November 2014 

Business 
Fiocco Lawyers 
Biddle Lawyers 
Cox West Lawyers 
Schultz Toomey O’Brien 
Bannister Law 

Location 
Perth, WA 
Victoria Point, QLD 
Penrith, NSW 
Sunshine Coast, QLD 
Sydney, NSW 

Business Type 
Personal Injury Law and Consumer Legal Services  
Consumer Legal Services 
Personal Injury Law and Consumer Legal Services 
Personal Injury Law and Consumer Legal Services 
Personal Injury Law  

The strategic rationale for these business acquisitions is: 

• 

to further expand the Group’s personal injuries and consumer legal services practice;  

•  synergies expected to be achieved as a result of combining the acquired businesses with the rest of the Group; and 

• 

to reaffirm the Group’s position as the leading law firm brand in the Australian consumer legal services market. 

The  consideration  transferred  and  the  final  value  of  the  consolidated  assets  and  liabilities  assumed  at  the  dates  of 
acquisition are as follows: 

Consideration 
Cash 
Equity issued (342,961 shares at $5.54 per share) 
Fair value of deferred consideration (cash) 
Net present value of total consideration  

Net assets acquired 

Assets 
- Trade and other receivables 
- Work in progress 
- Plant and equipment 
- Intangibles 
- Deferred taxation 
- Other assets 
Total assets acquired 

Liabilities 
- Bank overdraft 
- Payables 
- Provisions 
- Borrowings 
Total liabilities acquired 
Net assets acquired 
Goodwill on acquisition 

$’000 
19,165 
1,900 
4,653 
25,718 

Fair Value 
$’000 

3,642 
17,263 
1,473 
2,764 
527 
523 
26,192 

(53) 
(951) 
(637) 
(1,194) 
(2,835) 
23,357 
2,361 

There  were  342,961  shares  issued  as  part  of  the  consideration.  The  issue  price  of  $5.54  is  based  on  the  volume 
weighted average price of ordinary shares on the 130 business days immediately preceding the completion date. 

The profit and loss results of the acquired businesses are not set out. It is not practicable to disclose the profit and loss 
results of the acquired businesses as they have been integrated into the existing operations and reporting structure of 
the Group.   

It is also not practical to disclose the revenue and profit after tax of the combined entities as if these acquisitions took 
place on 1 July 2014 as the Group does not have access to audited financial information for the period prior to the dates 
of acquisition prepared on the same Group accounting policies. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 96 

117

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 31:  Business Combinations (continued) 
Acquisition of other businesses in Australia (continued)  

Acquisition-related costs for these acquisitions amounting to $235, 000 have been excluded from the total consideration 
and  have  been  recognised  as  an  expense  in  the  period  ended  30  June  2015,  within  the  ‘costs  associated  with 
acquisitions’ line item in the statement of profit or loss. 

Acquisition of business – Slater Gordon Solutions (provisionally accounted) 

On 29 May 2015 the Group acquired SGS from Quindell Plc.  SGS is comprised of 52 legal entities incorporated in the 
UK and Malta as outlined in Note 30.   

The principal activities of SGS are: 

I. 

II. 

III. 

First notification of loss (“FNOL”) services for various partner organisations, including insurance brokers, insurers, 
motoring  organisations  and  vehicle  manufacturers.    These  services  include  the  facilitation  of  vehicle  retrieval, 
repair and replacement vehicle hire for not at fault drivers; 

Conducting claims on behalf of not at fault parties to road traffic accidents (“RTA”), including credit hire, repair and 
personal injury claims. 

Conducting  claims  on  behalf  of  individuals  injured  in  the  course  of  employment  or  in  a  public  place  (“EL/PL”).  
One  species  of employers’  liability claim  that  SGS  is currently  conducting  are  personal  injury  claims  for  a  large 
group of people who allege noise induced hearing loss (“NIHL”) as a consequence of employment and who may 
be entitled to compensation as a result.  It is expected that these NIHL claims will be concluded in the next 1 to 3 
years; and 

IV. 

Services complementary to these claims processes, including: 

a. 

b. 

A medical reporting service for claimant lawyers; 

The assessment, triage and facilitation of rehabilitation services for not at fault parties injured in accidents; 
and 

c. 

A costing service for lawyers and law firms. 

The strategic rationale for this business acquisition is: 

• 

to become the leading personal injury group in the UK; and 

•  access to a comprehensive platform of businesses, processes and infrastructure that augments the Group’s existing 

UK operation. 

118

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 97 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 31:  Business Combinations (continued) 
Acquisition of business – Slater Gordon Solutions (provisionally accounted) (continued) 

The provisional consideration transferred and the value of the consolidated assets and liabilities assumed at the dates of 
acquisition is as follows: 

Consideration 
Cash 

Net present value of total consideration  

Net assets acquired 

Assets 
- Cash and cash equivalents 
- Trade and other receivables 
- Work in progress 
- Plant and equipment 
- Intangible assets 
- Current tax assets 
- Deferred tax assets 
- Other assets 
Total assets acquired 

Liabilities 
- Short-term borrowings 
- Current tax liability 
- Payables 
- Provisions 
- Deferred tax liabilities 
Total liabilities acquired 
Net assets acquired 
Goodwill on acquisition 

       $’000 
1,294,695 
1,294,695 

 Fair Value 
        $’000 

5,129 
358,956 
153,349 
4,890 
71,299 
29,041 
44,720 
8,010 
675,394 

(10) 
(14,080) 
(348,182) 
(4,794) 
(13,357) 
(380,423) 
294,971 
999,724 

The  initial  accounting  for  the  acquisition  of  SGS  has  only  been  provisionally  determined  at  the  end  of  the  reporting 
period. 

The  key  item  that  gave  rise  to  the goodwill above is  the capacity  of  SGS  to underpin  strategic  growth  of  the  personal 
injuries practice within the UK market. 

Since the acquisition date, SGS has contributed total revenue of $37,181,000 and loss after tax of $4,626,000 in the year 
ended  30  June  2015,  which  is  included  within  the  consolidated  profit.  As  at  the  date  of  reporting,  it  is  not  practical  to 
disclose the revenue and profit after tax of the combined entities as if the acquisition took place on 1 July 2014 as the 
Group does not have access to audited financial information for the period prior to the date of acquisition prepared on the 
same Group accounting policies. 

Acquisition-related costs for this acquisition amounting to $20,776,000 have been recognised as an expense in the year 
ended 30 June 2015, within the ‘costs associated with acquisitions’ line item in the statement of profit or loss. 

The acquisition of SGS has been provisionally accounted for at year end. Given the proximity of the acquisition date to 
the  reporting  date,  the  values  of  the  acquired  assets  and  liabilities  of  SGS  are  considered  provisional.  It  is  also  not 
practical for the Group to determine an estimate of the noise-induced hearing loss (“NIHL”) claims asset and associated 
deferred  consideration.  These  will  be  updated  within  12 months post-acquisition  in  accordance  with  AASB  3  Business 
Combinations.  The  directors  believe  deferred  consideration  would  be  in  the  range  of  £25  million  ($51  million)  to  £55 
million ($113 million). 

On  5  August  2015,  Quindell  Plc,  the  vendor  of  SGS,  published  qualified  financial  statements  in  which  the  current 
directors and auditors of Quindell Plc explained, inter alia, that relevant information relating to transactions entered into 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 98 

119

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 31:  Business Combinations (continued) 

Acquisition of business – Slater Gordon Solutions (provisionally accounted) (continued) 

by  the  former  directors  that  could  impact  on  the  accounting,  intention,  commercial  purpose  or  value  of  certain 
transactions was not available to them.  

 On 5 August 2015 the Serious Fraud Office in the United Kingdom advised that it has opened a criminal investigation 
into the business and accounting practices of Quindell Plc.   

The acquisition of SGS was structured as an acquisition of the various entities rather than an acquisition of the common 
stock of Quindell Plc.  Moreover, Quindell Plc provided detailed warranties to the Company in relation to the operations 
of the assets comprising SGS.  Those warranties are secured by a Warranty Escrow account holding £50m.   

The Company is confident that it has no liability as a result of the matters described above. 

In  the  course  of  preparing  these  financial  statements,  the  Directors  have  sought  to  identify,  understand  and  properly 
account for all relevant prior transactions undertaken by entities within SGS. Despite reasonable inquiries, including of 
current directors of Quindell Plc, the Directors are unable to identify or rationalise every historic transaction undertaken 
by  the  former  directors  of  the  various  entities  and  have  made  fair  value  adjustments  as  appropriate.  The  Directors 
believe that none of the known transactions relate to the fundamental business activities or economics of SGS and none 
of the known transactions are material in value or effect to the Company. 

Acquisition of other businesses in the UK (provisionally accounted) 

During the year ended 30 June 2015, the Group acquired the following businesses in the UK: 

  Acquisition Date 
  5 September 2014 
  8 May 2015 

Business 
Flint Bishop LLP 
Leo Abse Cohen 

Location 
Derby, UK 
Wales, UK 

The strategic rationale for these business acquisitions is: 

Business Type 
Personal Injury Law 
Personal Injury Law and Consumer Legal 
Services 

•  diversification of earnings through expansion of geographic coverage; and 

• 

to become a dominant law firm brand in the consumer legal services market in the UK. 

The provisional consideration transferred and the value of the consolidated assets and liabilities assumed at the dates of 
acquisition are as follows: 

Consideration 
Cash 
Fair value of deferred consideration (cash) 
Net present value of total consideration  

Net assets acquired 

Assets 
- Trade and other receivables 
- Work in progress 
- Plant and equipment 
- Other assets 
Total assets acquired 

       $’000 
13,136 
1,427 
14,563 

 Fair Value 
        $’000 

7,477 
26,295 
3,153 
850 
37,775 

Liabilities 
(4,499) 
- Payables 
(1,140) 
- Provisions 
(5,639) 
Total liabilities acquired 
32,136 
Net assets acquired 
(17,573)* 
Gain from bargain purchase 
*The  acquisition  of  Flint  Bishop  LLP  resulted  in  goodwill  of  $30,000  and  the  acquisition  of  Leo  Abse  Cohen  resulted  in  a  gain  from 
bargain purchase of $17,603,000. 

120

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 99 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 31:  Business Combinations (continued) 
Acquisition of other businesses in the UK (provisionally accounted) (continued)  

The initial accounting for the acquisitions have only been provisionally determined at the end of the reporting period. 

The profit and loss results of the acquired businesses are not set out. It is not practicable to disclose the profit and loss 
results of the acquired businesses as they have been integrated into the existing operations and reporting structure of 
the Group.   

It is also not practical to disclose the revenue and profit after tax of the combined entities as if these acquisitions took 
place on 1 July 2014 as the Group does not have access to audited financial information for the period prior to the dates 
of acquisition prepared on the same Group accounting policies. 

Acquisition-related costs for these acquisitions amounting to $458,000 have been recognised as an expense in the year 
ended 30 June 2015, within the ‘costs associated with acquisitions’ line item in the statement of profit or loss. 

Acquisition of business – Walker Smith Way Limited (provisionally accounted) 

On 30 April 2015, the Group acquired the business of Walker Smith Way Limited, a personal injury and consumer law 
practice operating throughout Northern England and Wales.  

The strategic rationale for this business acquisition is: 

•  diversification of earnings through expansion of geographic coverage; and 

• 

to become a dominant law firm brand in the consumer legal services market in the UK. 

The provisional consideration transferred and the value of the consolidated assets and liabilities assumed at the dates of 
acquisition are as follows: 

Consideration 
Cash 
Cash settled vendor debt 
Fair value of deferred consideration (cash) 
Net present value of total consideration  

Net assets acquired 

Assets 
- Cash and cash equivalents 
- Trade and other receivables 
- Work in progress 
- Plant and equipment 
Total assets acquired 

Liabilities 
- Payables 
- Provisions 
- Deferred tax liabilities 
Total liabilities acquired 
Net assets acquired 
Gain from bargain purchase 

$’000 
5,204 
6,427 
794 
12,425 

Fair Value 
$’000 

2,174 
7,449 
20,188 
67 
29,878 

(4,313) 
(1,328) 
(2,825) 
(8,466) 
21,412 
(8,987) 

The  initial  accounting  for  the  acquisition  of  WSW  has  only  been  provisionally  determined  at  the  end  of  the  reporting 
period. 

The profit and loss result of the acquired business is not set out. It is not practicable to disclose the profit and loss results 
of the acquired businesses as it has been integrated into the existing operations and reporting structure of the Group.   

It is also not practical to disclose the revenue and profit after tax of the combined entities as if these acquisitions took 
place on 1 July 2014 as the Group does not have access to audited financial information for the period prior to the date 
of acquisition prepared on the same Group accounting policies. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 100 

121

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 31:  Business Combinations (continued) 
Acquisition of business – Walker Smith Way Limited (provisionally accounted) (continued) 

Acquisition-related  costs  for  this  acquisition  amounting  to  $230,000  has  been  recognised  as  an  expense  in  the  year 
ended 30 June 2015, within the ‘costs associated with acquisitions’ line item in the statement of profit or loss. 

2014: 

Acquisition of business – Gibson & Gibson 

On  1  August  2013,  the  Group  acquired  the  business  of  Gibson  &  Gibson,  a personal  injuries law  firm  based  in  Perth, 
Western Australia, for a total consideration of $3,289,100.  Included in this amount is final goodwill of $1,636,314. 

Acquisition of business – Pannone Solicitors LLP (“Pannones”) and related entities 

Business  combinations  in  the  UK  in  2014  have  been  restated  for  the  effect  of  the  application  of  the  change  in  Group 
accounting policies discussed in Note 1. 

On 14 February 2014, the Group acquired the business of Pannone, a law firm based in Manchester, UK. On the same 
day  the  Group  also  acquired  two  related  entities,  Adroit  Financial  Planning  Limited  (“Adroit”)  and  Pannone  Trust 
Corporation Limited (“Pannone Trust”). Adroit Financial Planning Limited is a financial planning business. Pannone Trust 
Corporation  Limited  is  a  dormant  company,  initially  incorporated  to  act  as  the  administrator  of  estates  and  other 
appointments having fiduciary responsibility associated with Adroit.   

The strategic rationale for these business acquisitions is: 

•  diversification of earnings through expansion of geographic coverage; and 

• 

to become a dominant law firm brand in the consumer legal services market in the UK. 

The  initial accounting  for  the acquisition  had  previously  been  provisionally  determined. The  necessary  fair  valuation of 
consideration and net assets acquired have now been finalised and are reflected in the amounts detailed below.   

The value of the assets and liabilities at the date of acquisition and converted using the acquisition date rate of exchange 
are as follows: 

Consideration 

Cash 
Equity issued (37,718 shares at $4.42 per share) 
Fair value of deferred consideration (cash) 
Net present value of total consideration  

Net assets acquired 
Assets 
- Cash and cash equivalents 
- Trade and other receivables 
- Work in progress 
- Plant and equipment 
- Intangible assets 
- Other assets 
Total assets acquired 

Liabilities 
- Payables 
- Provisions 
Total liabilities acquired 

Net assets acquired 
Gain from bargain purchase 

122

Slater and Gordon Limited 

2014 
$’000          

Restated 
37,590 
167 
6,110 
43,867 

Fair Value 

518 
31,889 
41,773 
83 
1,110 
1,573 

76,946 

(27,253) 
(602) 

(27,855) 

49,091 
(5,224) 

Page 101 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 31:  Business Combinations (continued) 
Acquisition of business – Pannone Solicitors LLP (“Pannones”) and related entities (continued) 

There were 37,718 shares issued as part of the consideration. The issue price of $4.42 is based on the average of the 
volume  weighted  average  price  of  ordinary  shares  on  each  of  the  20  business  days  immediately  preceding  the 
completion date. 

In FY15 the Group entered into a variation deed with Pannones which reduces the deferred consideration payable for the 
acquisition. As a result the Group recognised a gain of $282,000 in the statement of profit or loss. 

Acquisition of business – Fentons Solicitors LLP (“Fentons”) 

The value of assets and liabilities at the date of acquisition and converted using the acquisition date rate of exchange are 
as follows: 

Consideration 
Cash 
Net present value of total consideration  

Net assets acquired 
Assets 
- Cash and cash equivalents 
- Trade and other receivables 
- Work in progress 
- Plant and equipment 
- Other assets 

Total assets acquired 

Liabilities 
- Payables 
- Provisions 

Total liabilities acquired 

Net assets acquired 
Gain from bargain purchase 

                        2014 
           $’000  
Restated 

43,266 
43,266 

Fair Value 

7 
43,768 
54,686 
1,518 
120 

100,099 

(40,176) 
(3,899) 

(44,075) 

56,024 
(12,758) 

Acquisition of other businesses in the UK 

The Group acquired the following other businesses in the UK in 2014: 

 Acquisition Date  Company 

Location 

Business Type  Acquired 

 16 August 2013 

Taylor Vinters LLP 

Cambridge, UK 

 30 August 2013 

Goodmans Law Limited 

Liverpool, UK 

 29 November 2013  John Pickering & Partners LLP  Halifax, UK 

 4 December 2013  Chadwick Lawrence LLP 

Yorkshire, UK 

Personal Injury 
Law 
Personal Injury 
Law 
Personal Injury 
Law 
Personal Injury 
Law 

Personal Injuries 
business operations and 
assets 
Business operations and 
assets 
Business operations and 
assets 
Personal Injuries 
business operations and 
assets 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 102 

123

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 31:  Business Combinations (continued) 

Consideration 
Cash 
Equity issued (110,808 shares at $3.07 per share) 
Fair value of deferred consideration (cash) 
Net present value of total consideration  

Net assets acquired 
Assets 
- Trade and other receivables 
- Work in progress 
- Plant and equipment 
- Other assets 

Total assets acquired 

Liabilities 
- Payables 
- Provisions 

Total liabilities acquired 

Net assets acquired 
Goodwill 

*Split as follows 

Taylor Vinters LLP 
Goodmans Law Limited 
John Pickering & Partners LLP 
Chadwick Lawrence LLP 

2014 
$’000       

Restated 

16,950 
340 
9,681 
26,971 

Fair Value 

9,665 
15,370 
9 
65 

25,109 

(5,488) 
(849) 

(6,337) 

18,772 
8,199* 

9,011 
(1,561) 
(219) 
968 

124

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 103 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 32:  Financial Risk Management 
The Group is exposed to a variety of financial risks comprising: 

i) 

ii) 

Credit risk 

Liquidity risk 

iii) 

Fair values 

iv) 

Interest rate risk 

v) 

Foreign exchange risk 

The board of directors has overall responsibility for identifying and managing operational and financial risks. 

The categories of financial instruments are as follows: 

Financial assets 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Loans and receivables 
Disbursements 
VCR Share Loans receivable 

Financial liabilities 
Payables 
Borrowings 
Other financial liabilities 
Derivatives 

i) 

Credit risk  

2015 

$’000 

96,985 
303,034 
396,583 
8,325 

804,927 

639,643 
720,353 
10,985 
1,621 
1,372,602 

2014 

$’000 
Restated 

25,270 
103,158 
126,210 
11,844 

266,482 

197,912 
126,331 
10,103 
1,020 
335,366 

Credit  risk is  the  risk  that  one  party  to  a  financial  instrument  will  cause a  financial loss for  the  other  party  by  failing  to 
discharge  an  obligation.  The main  exposure  to  credit  risk in  the  Group  is  represented by  the  receivables  (debtors and 
disbursements) owing to the Group. 

The maximum exposure to credit risk, excluding the value of any collateral or other security, at the end of the reporting 
period of recognised financial assets is the carrying amount of those assets, net of any provisions against those assets, 
as disclosed in the statement of financial position and notes to the financial statements. 

Credit risk – Slater Gordon Solutions (motor services) 

Debts are almost exclusively due from insurance companies.  The capitalisation of insurers is regulated by the Financial 
Conduct Authority in the UK. The insurance industry operates a policy holders’ protection scheme to alleviate the impact 
of the failure of an insurance company. 

Credit  risk  is  therefore  spread  across  major  UK  based  motor  insurers  in  proportion  to  their  respective  share  of  the 
market. No credit insurance is taken out given the regulated nature of these entities. 

No  interest  is  charged  on  the  receivables  balances  however  late  penalty  payments  become  payable  at  certain  dates 
under  the  Association  of  British  Insurers’  General  Terms  of  Agreement.  SGS  does  not  hold  any  collateral  over  these 
balances nor has the legal right of offset with any amounts owed by SGS to the receivables counterparty. 

There is also credit risk associated with unrendered disbursements and trade receivables. Once client matters are billed, 
a  significant  portion  of  receivables  related  to  the  personal  injuries  business  are  considered  low  risk.  This  is  because 
these receivables are collected directly from settlements paid by insurers into trust funds held on behalf of the Group’s 
clients. As at 30 June 2015, approximately 38% of trade receivables relate to the personal injury law business. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 104 

125

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 32:  Financial Risk Management (continued) 
i) 

Credit risk (continued) 

For  the  non-personal  injury  law  business,  the  Group  is  exposed  to  the  credit  risk  associated  with  the  client’s  ability  to 
meet their obligations under the fee and retainer agreement. The Group minimises the concentration of this credit risk by 
undertaking transactions with a large number of clients.   

Management of credit risk 

The Group actively manages its credit risk by: 

•  assessing the capability of a client to meet its obligations under the fee and retainer agreement; 

•  periodically reviewing the reasons for bad debt write-offs in order to improve the future decision making process; 

•  maintaining an adequate provision against the future recovery of debtors and disbursements; 

• 

including  in  practitioner’s  Key  Performance  Indicators  (“KPI’s”)  measurements  in  respect  of  debtor  levels,  recovery 
and investment in disbursements; 

•  providing ongoing training to staff in the management of their personal and practice group debtor portfolios; and 

•  where  necessary,  pursuing  the  recovery  of  debts  owed  to  the  Group  through  external  mercantile  agents  and  the 

courts. 

At 30 June 2015, the maximum exposure to credit risk for trade and other receivables by segment was as follows: 

Australia 
UK 
SGS 

2015 

$’000 

111,151 
213,947 
374,519 

699,617 

2014 

$’000           

96,249 
133,119 
- 

229,368 

Due to the nature of the “No Win No Fee” arrangements applicable to the majority of the legal matters managed by the 
Group  an  increase  in  the  required  processing  time  between  initiation  and settlement  and  an  increase  in  the  ageing  of 
receivables, particularly disbursements, does not always increase the associated credit risk. 

Management performs periodic assessment of the recoverability of receivables, and provisions are calculated based on 
historical write-offs of the receivables as well as any known circumstances relating to the matters in progress. 

Cash and cash equivalents 

The Group held cash and cash equivalents of $96,985,000 at 30 June 2015 (30 June 2014: $25,270,000). The credit risk 
associated with cash and cash equivalents are considered as minimal as the cash and cash equivalents are held with 
reputable financial institutions in Australia and UK.  

ii) 

Liquidity risk 

Liquidity risk is the risk that an entity will encounter difficulty in meeting obligations associated with financial liabilities. 

Management of liquidity risk 

The Group manages liquidity risk by monitoring forecast cash flows and ensuring that adequate borrowing facilities are 
maintained.  Refer  to  the  statement  of  cash  flows  and  Note  23:  Cash  Flow  Information,  for  further  information  on  the 
historical cash flows and the current borrowing facilities below. 

KPIs are set for practitioners relating to budgeted fee events, which are closely monitored by senior management. 

126

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 105 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 32:  Financial Risk Management (continued) 
ii) 

Liquidity risk (continued) 

The  Group  actively  reviews  its  funding  position  to  ensure  the  available  facilities  are  adequate  to  meet  its  current  and 
anticipated needs. 

Total banking facilities 
Bank overdrafts 
Cash advance facility 
Other sundry facilities 

Total credit facilities 

Amount utilised 

Unused bank facilities 

Bank overdrafts 

2015 

$’000 

 7,053 
859,688 
27,736 

894,477 

2014 

$’000 

5,000 
200,000 
15,640 

220,640 

(720,049) 

174,428 

(125,657) 

94,983 

Bank  overdraft  facilities  are  arranged  with Westpac  and  Royal  Bank  of  Scotland  (National Westminster  Bank)  with  the 
general  terms  and  conditions  being  set  and  agreed  to  annually.  The  current  facilities  are  $5,000,000  and  £1,000,000 
respectively (2014: $5,000,000). Interest rates are variable and subject to adjustment. 

Cash advance and equipment finance facility 

The  Group  entered  into  a  new  multicurrency  (AUD/GBP)  syndicated  bank  facility  in  June  2015  with  the  following 
structure and maturity profile: 

•  a GBP 157,500,000 revolving loan facility. This facility expires in June 2018 and interest is charged on the loans at 

LIBOR plus an agreed margin; 

•  a GBP 157,500,000 revolving loan facility. This facility expires in June 2020 and interest is charged on the loans at 

LIBOR plus an agreed margin; 

•  a GBP 60,000,000 revolving loan facility, bank guarantee facility and/or letter of credit. This facility expires in June 

2018 and interest is charged on the loans at LIBOR plus an agreed margin; 

•  an AUD 45,000,000 revolving loan facility. This facility expires in June 2018 and interest is charged on the loans at 

BBSY Bid plus an agreed margin; and 

•  an AUD 45,000,000 revolving loan facility. This facility expires in June 2020 and interest is charged on the loans at 

BBSY Bid plus an agreed margin. 

The proceeds of the loan facilities have been used to settle existing finance debt, general corporate purposes, the SGS 
acquisitions  and  future  acquisitions.  The  bank  guarantee  facility/letter  of  credit  will  be  used  to  meet  the  day  to  day 
working capital requirements, corporate purposes and future acquisitions.  

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 106 

127

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 32:  Financial Risk Management (continued) 
ii) 

Liquidity risk (continued) 

Maturity analysis 

The table below represents the undiscounted contractual settlement terms for financial instruments and management’s 
expectation for settlement of undiscounted maturities. 

2015 
Non-derivative financial liabilities 
Payables 
Borrowings 
Other current liabilities 

Financial liability maturities 

2014 
Restated 

Non-derivative financial liabilities 
Payables 
Borrowings 
Other current liabilities 

Financial liability maturities 

< 12 
Months 
$’000 

636,523 
3,753 
10,985 

651,261 

1-5 years 
$’000 

3,120 
716,600 
- 
719,720 

Total 
contractual 
cash flows 
$’000 

639,643 
720,353 
10,985 

Carrying 
amount 
$’000 

639,643 
720,353 
10,985 

1,370,981 

1,370,981 

190,527 
9,077 
10,103 

209,707 

7,385 
117,254 
- 
124,639 

197,912 
126,331 
10,103 
334,346 

197,912 
126,331 
10,103 
334,346 

Refer to Note 32 (iv) for the maturity analysis of interest rate swaps.  

iii) 

Fair values  

The fair value of financial assets and financial liabilities not measured at fair value approximates their carrying amounts 
as disclosed in the statement of financial position and notes to the financial statements.  

Management of fair value risk in interest rate swaps 

The  Group  measures  its  interest  rate  swaps  at  fair  value.  These  fair  values  are  based  on  level  2  fair  value 
measurements, as defined in the fair value hierarchy in AASB 13 Fair Value Measurement with reference to market data 
which can be used to estimate future cash flows and discount them to present value. Management’s aim is to use and 
source this data consistently from period to period. 

128

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 107 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 32:  Financial Risk Management (continued) 
iv) 

Interest rate risk 

Interest  rate  risk  is  the  risk  that  the  fair  value  or future  cash  flows  of  a  financial instrument  will  fluctuate  as  a  result  of 
changes in market interest rates. 

The Group's exposure to interest rate risks and the effective interest rates of non-derivative financial assets and financial 
liabilities both recognised and unrecognised at the end of the reporting period are as follows: 

Financial Instruments 

Weighted 
average 
interest rate 
2014 
2015 

Non-interest 
bearing 

Variable interest 
rate 

Fixed interest rate 

Total 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 
Restated 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000   
Restated 

(i) Financial assets 

Cash 

0.09%  0.88% 

- 

- 

96,985 

25,270 

Trade debtors 

Disbursements 

Other receivables 

VCR share loans 
receivable 

Total financial assets 

(ii) Financial liabilities 
Trade creditors and 
accruals 

Legal creditors 
Non-interest bearing 
vendor liabilities – 
acquisitions 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

-  296,946             

102,859 

-  396,583              

126,210 

- 

- 

6,088                  299 

8,325  

11,844 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

  707,942  241,212 

96,985 

25,270 

-  281,170 

74,792 

-  336,588  101,554 

- 

21,885 

21,566 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Other current liabilities 

4.45%  4.45% 

6.04%  7.42% 

2.26%  2.49% 

2.17%  3.02% 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

10,985 

10,103 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Hire purchase liability 
Bills of exchange – fixed 
rate 
Bills of exchange – 
variable rate 

Total financial liabilities 

Interest rate swaps  

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

96,985 

25,270 

296,946  102,859 

396,583              

126,210 

6,088 

299 

8,325 

11,844 

804, 927  266,482 

281,170 

74,792 

336,588  101,554 

21,885 

21,566 

10,985 

10,103 

9,429 

6,418 

9,429 

6,418 

96,314  80,094 

96,314 

80,094 

-  614,610 

39,819 

- 

- 

614,610 

39,819 

  639,643  197,912  625,595 

49,922  105,743  86,512  1,370,981  334,346 

Interest rate swap transactions are entered into by the Group to exchange variable and fixed interest payment obligations 
to protect long-term borrowings from the risk of increasing interest rates. The Group uses swap contracts to maintain a 
designated proportion of fixed to floating debt. 

The  notional  principal  amounts  of  the  swap  contracts  approximate  14%  (2014:  67%)  of  the  Group’s  outstanding 
borrowings  on  the  cash  advance  facility  (excluding  the  working  capital  facility)  at  30  June  2015.  The  net  interest 
payments  or  receipt  settlements  of  the  swap  contracts  are  matched  to  the  maturity  of  the  cash  advance  they  are 
hedging. The net settlement amounts are brought into account as an adjustment to interest expense. At the end of the 
reporting period, the details of outstanding contracts, all of which are to receive floating/pay-fixed interest rate swaps, are 
as follows: 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 108 

129

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 32:  Financial Risk Management (continued) 
iv) 

Interest rate risk (continued) 

Maturity of notional amounts 

0 to 2 years 
2 to 5 years 

Effective average 
fixed interest rate 
payable 
2014 

2015 

Notional principal value 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 

17,500 
62,594 

80,094 

2.23% 
2.27% 

4.18%                 35,534  
2.02%                 60,801  

96,335 

The net effective variable interest rate borrowings (i.e. unhedged debt) expose the Group to interest rate risk which will 
impact future cash flows and interest charges and are indicated by the following interest rate financial liabilities: 

Floating rate instruments: 
Unhedged cash advances/bills of exchanges 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 

614,610 
614,610 

39,819 
39,819 

Interest rate swaps are measured at fair value with gains and losses taken to the cash flow hedge reserve until such time 
as  the  profit  or  loss  associated  with  the  hedged  risk  is  recognised  in  the  consolidated  statement  of  comprehensive 
income. Given the matching of the hedge settlements with the payment of interest expense on the hedged borrowings, 
the balance in the reserve attributable to interest rate swaps is generally minimal. 

Interest rate sensitivity  

If interest rates were to increase/decrease by 100 basis points from rates used to determine fair values as at the end of 
the  reporting  period,  assuming  all  other  variables  that  might  impact  on  fair  value  remain  constant,  then  the  impact  on 
profit for the year and equity is as follows: 

+/- 100 basis points: 
Impact on profit after tax 
Impact on equity 

v) 

Foreign exchange risk 

2015 
$’000 

- 
3,098 

2014 
$’000 

- 
2,371 

The Group is exposed to currency risk on services income, expenses, receivables and borrowings that are denominated 
in  a currency  other  than  respective  functional currencies  of  the  group  entities.  The major  functional currencies  are the 
Australian Dollar (AUD) and Sterling (GBP). 

In relation to recognised assets and liabilities denominated in a currency other than the entity’s functional currency, the 
group hedges all foreign currency exposures via a natural hedge. 

Foreign currency net investment translation risk relating to the acquisition of Slater Gordon Solutions is partially hedged 
through  borrowings  denominated  in  GBP,  resulting  in  an  overall  reduction  in  the  net  assets  that  are  translated.  The 
remaining translation exposure is not hedged.  

The  Group  has no  significant exposures  to currency  risk  other  than  translation of  its  foreign  subsidiaries  in the  United 
Kingdom  (UK).      Any  impacts  on  the  balances  relating  to  Slater  and  Gordon  subsidiaries  in  the  UK  as  a  result  of 
movements  in  the  foreign  exchange  rate  are  recorded  in  other  comprehensive  income  as  foreign  currency  translation 
reserve. Refer to Note 1(s). 

The Group has no other significant exposures to foreign exchange risk. 

130

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 109 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 33:  Fair Value Measurements 
i) 

Fair value hierarchy 

Refer to Note 2 (d) for discussion on the fair value hierarchy. 

30 June 2015 
Recurring Fair Value Measurements 

Financial liabilities 
Derivative financial instruments – interest rate swaps 
Contingent consideration 

30 June 2014  
Restated 
Recurring Fair Value Measurements 

Financial liabilities 
Derivative financial instruments – interest rate swaps 

Contingent consideration 

Level 1 
$’000 

Level 2 
$’000 

Level 3 
$’000 

- 
- 
- 

1,621 
- 
1,621 

- 
6,090 
6,090 

Total 
$’000 

1,621 
6,090 
7,711 

Level 1 

Level 2 

Level 3 

Total 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

- 

- 
- 

1,020 

- 
1,020 

- 

12,633 
12,633 

1,020 

12,633 
13,653 

30 June 2015 
Financial instruments not measured at fair value 

Level 1 
$’000 

Level 2 
$’000 

Level 3 
$’000 

Total 
$’000 

Financial assets 
Trade and other receivables 

Total  

Financial liabilities 
Trade Creditors* 
Legal Creditors 
Vendor Liabilities – acquisitions  
Borrowings 
Finance Lease Liability 

Total  

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 

303,034 
303,034 

303,034 
303,034 

- 
- 
- 
710,924 
9,429 

720,353 

98,558 
336,588 
21,886 
- 
- 

98,558 
336,588 
21,886 
710,924 
9,429 

457,032 

1,177,385 

30 June 2014  
Restated 
Financial instruments not measured at fair value 

Level 1 

Level 2 

Level 3 

Total 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

Financial assets 
Trade and other receivables 

Total  

Financial liabilities 
Trade Creditors* 
Legal Creditors 
Vendor Liabilities – acquisitions  
Borrowings 
Finance Lease Liability 

Total  

*Accrued expenses that are not financial liabilities are excluded 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 

- 
- 

119,913 
6,418 

126,331 

103,158 
103,158 

103,158 
103,158 

11,914 
101,554 
21,566 
- 
- 
135,034 

11,914 
101,554 
21,566 
119,913 
6,418 
261,365 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 110 

131

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 33:  Fair Value Measurements (continued) 
ii) 

Valuation techniques and inputs used in Level 2 and 3 fair value measurements 

The fair value of the interest rate swaps is measured with reference to market data which can be used to estimate future 
cash  flows.  The  key  input  into  this  valuation  is  the  interest  rate  swap  revaluation  statement  as  provided  by  Westpac 
Banking Corporation and National Australia Bank. 

The fair value of contingent consideration payable in a business combination is measured with reference to current fee 
and performance forecasts which can be used to estimate future cash flows. The key inputs into this valuation are the 
estimated future cash flows and the average discount rate of 9.2% used to determine the present value the future cash 
flows. 

iii) 

Reconciliation of recurring Level 3 fair value movements 

Contingent Consideration 
Opening balance 
Acquisitions 
Payments 
Adjustment to contingent consideration 
Interest  
Exchange differences 
Closing balance 

2015 
$’000 

7,927 
4,185 
(1,865) 
(4,983) 
378 
447 
6,089 

2014 
$’000 
Restated 

7,976 
6,794 
(4,947) 
(2,668) 
930 
(158) 
7,927 

There has been no change in the range of undiscounted contingent consideration outcomes during the year. 

iv) 

Sensitivity analysis for recurring Level 3 fair value measurements 

A  reasonable  movement  in  the  unobservable  inputs  would  not  significantly  impact  the  fair  value  of  contingent 
consideration as at the end of the reporting period and therefore not impact profit after tax and equity. 

132

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 111 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 34:  Prior Period Error  
The Group has identified two errors in the method used to report receipts from customers and payments to suppliers and 
employees by the UK business during the current reporting period: 

•  From the initial date of acquisition of Russell Jones and Walker LLP in the year ended 30 June 2012 until the period 
ended 31 December 2013, the UK business reported receipts from customers on a ‘gross’ rather than a ‘net’ basis in 
accordance  with  Group  Reporting  Policy.  This  effect  was  wholly  offset  by  the  same  amount  being  added  to  the 
calculation  of  total  payments  to  suppliers  and  employees.  The  amounts  represented  customer  disbursements  and 
related Value Added Tax (VAT). Net cash derived from operating activities in all periods was unaffected and remains 
as reported. 

• 

In the 30 June 2014 and 31 December 2014 financial statements UK VAT is duplicated in receipts from customers. 
This effect was wholly offset by the same amount being included in total payments to suppliers and employees. The 
cause  of  this  was  an  arithmetic  error  in  the  consolidation  spread  sheet  model  operated  in  the  Company’s  UK 
business  at  that  time.  Net  cash  derived  from  operating  activities  in  all  periods  was  unaffected  and  remains  as 
reported. 

The  error  has  been  corrected  by  restating  each  of  the  affected  financial  statement  line  items  for  the  prior  periods,  as 
follows: 

Previous 

Cash flow from operating activities 
Receipts from customers 
Payments to suppliers and employees 
Interest received 
Borrowing costs 
Income tax (paid)/refunded 
Net cash provided by operating activities 

Restated 

Cash flow from operating activities 
Receipts from customers 
Payments to suppliers and employees 
Interest received 
Borrowing costs 
Income tax (paid)/refunded 
Net cash provided by operating activities 

Year ended 30 
June 2012 
$’000 

Year ended 30 
June 2013 
$’000 

Year ended 30 
June 2014 
$’000 

202,929 
(182,110) 
357 
(5,374) 
157 
15,959 

324,279 
(285,148) 
281 
(6,158) 
(537) 
32,717 

442,609 
(375,225) 
401 
(5,344) 
(8,006) 
54,435 

Year ended 30 
June 2012 
$’000 

Year ended 30 
June 2013 
$’000 

Year ended 30 
June 2014 
$’000 

199,813 
(178,994) 
357 
(5,374) 
157 
15,959 

288,719 
(249,588) 
281 
(6,158) 
(537) 
32,717 

410,142 
(342,758) 
401 
(5,344) 
(8,006) 
54,435 

Difference in net cash provided by operating activities 

- 

- 

- 

The error does not have an impact on the Company’s retained earnings, profit or loss previously reported earnings per 
share nor the cash and cash equivalent balances in the prior periods.  

Note 35:  Subsequent Events 
Subsequent to the end of the financial year, all unvested VCR shares at 30 June 2015 have either vested and converted 
into  ordinary  shares  (subject  to  disposal  restrictions)  or  have  been  approved  for  redemption.  Other  than  the 
aforementioned, there have not been any matters or circumstances that have significantly affected, or may significantly 
affect, the results reported in the financial statements. 

Note 36:  Deed of Cross Guarantee    
Slater  and  Gordon  Limited,  Trilby  Misso  Lawyers  Limited  and  Slater  &  Gordon  Lawyers  NSW  Pty  Ltd  are  parties  to  a 
deed of cross guarantee under which each company guarantees the debts of the others. By entering into the deed, the 
wholly-owned entities have been relieved from the requirement to prepare a financial report and directors’ report under 
Class Order 98/1418 (as amended) issued by the Australian Securities and Investments Commission. 

A  consolidated  statement  of  comprehensive  income  and  statement  of  financial  position,  comprising  the  Company  and 
controlled entities subject to the deed, after eliminating all transactions between parties to the deed of cross guarantee is 
set out as follows: 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 112 

133

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 36:  Deed of Cross Guarantee (continued) 

Statement of Comprehensive Income 
Revenue 
Finance costs 
Other expenses 
Profit before income tax expense 
Income tax expense 
Profit for the year 

Changes in fair value of cash flow hedges and foreign currency translation, net 
of tax 
Total comprehensive income for the year 

Statement of Financial Position 
Current assets 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Receivables 
Work in progress 
Other current assets 
Total current assets 
Non-current assets 
Plant and equipment 
Receivables 
Work in progress 
Intangible assets   
Investment in subsidiary 
Other non-current assets 
Deferred tax assets 
Total non-current assets 
Total assets 
Current liabilities 
Payables 
Short term borrowings 
Current tax liabilities  
Provisions 
Total current liabilities 
Non-current liabilities 
Payables 
Long term borrowings 
Deferred tax liabilities 
Derivative financial instruments 
Provision 
Total non-current liabilities 
Total liabilities 
Net assets 

Equity 
Contributed equity 
Reserves 
Retained profits 
Total equity 

134

Slater and Gordon Limited 

2015 
$’000 

270,958 
(6,172) 
(217,273) 
47,513 
(14,201) 
33,312 

   2014 
$’000 
Restated 

226,778 
(5,138) 
(171,820) 
49,820 
(16,408) 
33,412 

11,303 
44,615 

4,758 
38,170 

12,923 
198,129 
177,535 
7,598 
396,185 

10,657 
11,947 
131,993 
57,788 
945,640 
15,179 
28,932 
1,202,136 
1,598,321 

71,333 
2,510 
4,564 
26,757 
105,164 

3,123 
84,647 
115,108 
1,257 
2,921 
207,056 
312,220 
1,286,101 

1,098,345 
26,261 
161,495 
1,286,101 

11,620 
192,813 
174,150 
5,323 
383,906 

7,611 
13,095 
108,685 
58,702 
7,678 
11,844 
14,783 
222,398 
606,304 

62,777 
1,351 
854 
16,137 
81,119 

2,765 
44,298 
102,152 
759 
3,034 
153,008 
234,127 
372,177 

217,049 
9,326 
145,802 
372,177 

Page 113 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2015 

Note 37:  Parent Entity Disclosures 
As  at,  and  throughout,  the  financial  year  ended  30  June  2015  the  parent  entity  of  the  Group  was  Slater  and  Gordon 
Limited. 

Results of parent entity 
Profit for the year 
Other comprehensive income 
Total comprehensive income for the year 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 
Restated 

65,128 
11,303 
76,431 

36,054 
4,758 
40,812 

There  has  been  a  recharge  by  the  parent  entity  of  management  and  associated  services  and  interest  expense  to  the 
subsidiary entities. 

Financial position for the parent entity at year end 
Current assets 
Non-current assets 
Total assets 

Current liabilities 
Non-current liabilities 
Total liabilities 

Total equity of the parent company comprising of 
Contributed equity 
Reserves 
Retained profits 
Total Equity 

Other commitments and contingencies 

374,540 
1,226,906 
1,601,446 

101,888 
201,369 
303,257 

1,098,345 
26,261 
173,583 
1,298,189 

332,308 
236,398 
568,706 

75,551 
140,644 
216,195 

217,049 
9,382 
126,080 
352,511 

The Company has agreements with third party disbursement funders, ASK Funding Limited and Equal Access Funding 
Proprietary Limited (“the existing Funders”), to provide financial guarantees to the funders with respect to disbursement 
funding  borrowings  to  the  Group’s  clients.  The  nature  of  this  agreement  is  that  the  funders  will  fund  disbursements  in 
respect  of  individual  matters  and  will  be  reimbursed  out  of  any  settlement  proceeds  on  the  matter.  The  Group  has 
provided a financial guarantee for the repayment of the clients’ obligations to the funders.   

Since  30 June  2014,  the  Company  ended  its  arrangement  with  ASK  Funding  and  settled  all  disbursements previously 
funded  by  ASK  Funding  and  recognised  them  as  part  of  the  receivables  balance  at  30  June  2015.  The  total  amount 
funded by the funders (existing and assumed) to the Company’s clients at 30 June 2015 is $13,603,000 (30 June 2014: 
$10,591,000). The maximum exposure of the Company at 30 June 2015 is $13,603,000 (30 June 2014: $10,591,000) if 
the disbursements on client matters are not recovered from any other party. 

Operating lease commitments 

2015 
$’000 

2014 
$’000 

Non-cancellable operating leases (including rental of office space) contracted but not capitalised in the parent financial 
statements. 
Within one year 
One year or later and not later than five years 
Greater than five years 

12,636 
30,140 
6,712 

11,986 
31,775 
6,342 

49,488 

50,103 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 114 

135

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Slater and Gordon Limited 
Directors’ Declaration 

The directors declare that the financial statements and notes set out on pages 66 to 135 and the directors’ report are in 
accordance with the Corporations Act 2001 and: 

(a) 

(b) 

(c) 

Comply  with  Accounting  Standards  and  the  Corporations  Regulations  2001,  and  other  mandatory  professional 
reporting requirements; 

As stated in Note 1, the financial statements also comply with International Financial Reporting Standards; 

Give  a  true  and  fair  view  of  the  financial  position  of  the  consolidated  entity  as  at  30  June  2015  and  of  its 
performance  as  represented  by  the  results  of  its  operations,  changes  in  equity  and  its  cash  flows,  for  the  year 
ended on that date. 

In the directors’ opinion there are reasonable grounds to believe that 

•  Slater and Gordon Limited will be able to pay its debts as and when they become due and payable. 

• 

the  Company  and  the  group entities  identified  in  Note  36 will  be able  to  meet  any  obligations or  liabilities  to  which 
they are or may become subject to by virtue of the Deed of Cross Guarantee between the Company and those group 
entities pursuant to ASIC Class Order 98/1418. 

This declaration has been made after receiving the declarations required to be made by the chief executive officer and 
chief financial officer to the directors in accordance with sections 295A of the Corporations Act 2001 for the financial year 
ended 30 June 2015. 

This declaration is made in accordance with a resolution of the directors. 

John Skippen 

Chair 

Melbourne 

29 September 2015 

Andrew Grech 

Group Managing Director 

136

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 115 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SLATER AND GORDON LIMITED  
ABN 93 097 297 400 
AND CONTROLLED ENTITIES 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR'S REPORT 
TO THE MEMBERS OF 
SLATER AND GORDON LIMITED  

Report on the Financial Report 

We have audited the accompanying financial report of Slater and Gordon Limited and controlled entities, 
which  comprises  the  consolidated  statement  of  financial  position  as  at  30  June  2015,  the  consolidated 
statement  of  comprehensive  income,  consolidated  statement  of  changes  in  equity  and  consolidated 
statement  of  cash  flows  for  the  year  then  ended,  notes  comprising  a  summary  of  significant  accounting 
policies  and  other  explanatory  information,  and  the  directors’  declaration  of  the  consolidated  entity 
comprising  the  company  and  the  entities  it  controlled  at  the  year's  end  or  from  time  to  time  during  the 
financial year. 

Directors’ Responsibility for the Financial Report 

The directors of the company are responsible for the preparation of the financial report that gives a true and 
fair view in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Act 2001 and for such 
internal control as the directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of the financial report that 
gives a true and fair view and is free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. In Note 1, 
the  directors  also  state,  in  accordance  with  Accounting  Standard  AASB  101  Presentation  of  Financial 
Statements, that the financial statements comply with International Financial Reporting Standards. 

Auditor's Responsibility 

Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the financial report based on our audit. We conducted our audit 
in  accordance  with  Australian  Auditing  Standards.  Those  standards  require  that  we  comply  with  relevant 
ethical requirements relating to audit engagements and plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable 
assurance about whether the financial report is free from material misstatement. 

An audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the 
financial report. The procedures selected depend on the auditor's judgement, including the assessment of 
the risks of material misstatement of the financial report, whether due to fraud or error. In making those risk 
assessments, the auditor considers internal control relevant to the company’s preparation of the financial 
report  that  gives  a  true  and  fair  view  in  order  to  design  audit  procedures  that  are  appropriate  in  the 
circumstances,  but  not  for  the  purpose  of  expressing  an  opinion  on  the  effectiveness  of  the  company's 
internal control. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the 
reasonableness of accounting estimates made by the directors, as well as evaluating the overall presentation 
of the financial report. 

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our 
audit opinion. 

An independent Victorian Partnership ABN 27 975 255 196 
Level 19, 15 William Street, Melbourne VIC 3000 
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation 

Pitcher Partners is an association of independent firms 
Melbourne  |  Sydney  |  Perth  |  Adelaide  |  Brisbane|  Newcastle
An independent member of Baker Tilly International 

116 

137

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  SLATER AND GORDON LIMITED  
ABN 93 097 297 400 
AND CONTROLLED ENTITIES 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR'S REPORT 
TO THE MEMBERS OF 
SLATER AND GORDON LIMITED  

Independence 

In conducting our audit, we have complied with the independence requirements of the Corporations Act 
2001. 

Opinion 

In our opinion:  

(a) 

the financial report of Slater and Gordon Limited and controlled entities is in accordance with the 
Corporations Act 2001, including: 

(i) 

giving a true and fair view of the consolidated entity's financial position as at 30 June 2015 and 
of its performance for the year ended on that date; and 

(ii) 

complying with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Regulations 2001; and 

(b) 

the consolidated financial report also complies with International Financial Reporting Standards as 
disclosed in Note 1. 

Report on the Remuneration Report 

We have audited the Remuneration Report included in pages 35 to 63 of the directors' report for the year 
ended 30 June 2015. The directors of the company are responsible for the preparation and presentation of 
the Remuneration Report in accordance with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001. Our responsibility 
is  to  express  an  opinion  on  the  Remuneration  Report,  based  on  our  audit  conducted  in  accordance  with 
Australian Auditing Standards. 

Opinion 

In our opinion, the Remuneration Report of Slater and Gordon Limited and controlled entities for the year 
ended complies with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001. 

A R FITZPATRICK
Partner

29 September 2015 

PITCHER PARTNERS 
Melbourne 

An independent Victorian Partnership ABN 27 975 255 196 
Level 19, 15 William Street, Melbourne VIC 3000 
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation 

Pitcher Partners is an association of independent firms 
Melbourne  |  Sydney  |  Perth  |  Adelaide  |  Brisbane|  Newcastle
An independent member of Baker Tilly International 

117 

138

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited  Additional ASX Information 

In accordance with the Australian Stock Exchange Limited Listing Rules, the Directors provide the following information 
as at 14 September 2015. 

a). 

Distribution of shareholders and option holders. 

Number of Ordinary Shareholders 

VCR Shares 

Performance Rights 

Holding 

1 
1,001 
5,001 
10,001 
100,001 

- 1,000 
- 5,000 
- 10,000 
- 100,000 
- Over 

5,267 
9,354 
2,926 
2,220 
166 
19,933 

- 
1 
- 
19 
- 
20 

There are 275 shareholders holding less than a marketable parcel (i.e. less than $500 per parcel of shares). 

b). 

Twenty largest shareholders 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 
11 

12 

13 

14 
15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

Shareholder  

National Nominees Limited 

HSBC Custody Nominees (Australia) Limited 

J P Morgan Nominees Australia Limited 

Citicorp Nominees Pty Limited 

BNP Paribas Noms Pty Ltd (DRP) 

Mr Andrew Grech 

Mr Ken Fowlie 

Mr Hayden Stephens 

Ms Cath Evans 

Citicorp Nominees Pty Limited (Colonial First State Inv A/C) 
HSBC Custody Nominees (Australia) Limited - A/C 3 

UBS Nominees Pty Ltd 

Merrill Lynch (Australia) Nominees Pty Limited 

Wildflower Investments Pty Ltd (Evans Family S/F A/C) 
HSBC Custody Nominees (Australia) Limited (Nt-Comnwlth Super Corp 
A/C) 

Deansgate 123 LLP 

AMP Life Limited 

Bond Street Custodians Limited (Cockej - F01832 A/C) 

Joeman Holdings Pty Ltd 

Custodial Services Limited (Beneficiaries Holding A/C) 

- 
16 
19 
19 
- 
54 

     % 
Held 

14.54 

14.07 

13.43 

3.15 

3.12 

1.82 

1.45 

1.21 

1.14 

1.11 
0.91 

0.87 

0.64 

0.59 

0.50 

0.43 

0.43 

0.40 

0.35 

Number of 
Shares held    

50,996,052 

49,347,216 

47,091,870 

11,051,410 

10,930,978 

6,383,238 

5,096,221 

4,255,115 

3,981,433 

3,875,618 
3,203,242 

3,037,159 

2,232,958 

2,060,545 

1,752,472 

1,516,015 

1,507,386 

1,390,267 

1,240,170 

1,233,844 
212,183,209 

0.35 
60.51 

c). 

Substantial shareholders 

A  substantial  shareholder  is  one  who  has  a  relevant  interest  in  5  per  cent  or  more  of  the  total  issued  shares  in  the 
Company. Following are the substantial shareholders in the Company based on notifications provided to the Company 
under the Corporations Act 2001: 

Shareholder 
National Australia Bank Limited and its Associated Companies 
UBS Group AG and its related bodies corporate 

Number 
24,345,327 
25,936,975 

Ordinary Shares 
% * 
6.94 
 7.40 

* Percentage of shares held based on total issued capital of the Company at the time a substantial shareholder notice was provided to 
the Company. 

d). 

Voting rights 

All issued ordinary shares carry one vote per share. 

VCR shares and performance rights do not carry any voting rights. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 118 

139

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
Corporate Directory 

Directors 
John Skippen, Chair 
Andrew Grech, Group Managing Director 
Ian Court 
Ken Fowlie  
Erica Lane 
Rhonda O’Donnell 

  Auditors 
  Pitcher Partners 

Level 19 
15 William Street 

  Melbourne Victoria 3000 

Company Secretaries 
Wayne Brown 
Kirsten Morrison 

Registered Office and 
Corporate Office 
Level 12 
485 La Trobe Street 
Melbourne Victoria 3000 
Telephone: (03) 9602 6888 
Facsimile: (03) 9600 0290 

Company Website 
www.slatergordon.com.au 

Company Numbers 
ACN 097 297 400 
ABN 93 097 297 400 

  Bankers 
  Westpac Banking  
  Corporation 
Level 7 
150 Collins Street 

  Melbourne Victoria 3000 

  National Australia Bank 

Level 30 
500 Bourke Street 

  Melbourne Victoria 3000 

  Solicitors 
  Arnold Bloch Leibler 

Level 21 
333 Collins Street 

  Melbourne Victoria 3000 

  Securities Exchange Listing 
  Slater and Gordon Limited 
shares are listed on the  

  Australian Securities  
  Exchange. The Home Exchange 

is Melbourne 
  ASX Code: SGH 

  Share/Security Registers 

The Registrar 

  Computershare Investor  
  Services Pty Ltd 
  Yarra Falls  

452 Johnston Street 
  Abbotsford Victoria 3067 

  GPO Box 2975 
  Melbourne Victoria 3001 

Telephone 
Toll Free 1300 850 505  
(Australia) 
+61 3 9415 4000 
(Overseas) 

Investor Centre Website: 
  www.computershare.com.au 

  Email:  
  web.queries@computershare.com.au 

140

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 120 

  Annual Report 2015Slater and Gordon Limited   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
slatergordon.com.au